JP2015136508A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving interest in a game by making a variable display game currently being executed enjoyable regardless of the type of start storage.SOLUTION: A game machine includes variable display game execution means for consuming first and second start storage in a winning order to execute a variable display game, standby reservation display means for displaying a reservation image corresponding to the first start storage and a reservation image corresponding to the second start storage in a first display area in the generation order of winning, and consumption reservation display means for displaying a reservation image of start storage that is currently executing a variable display game in a second display area. The first display area and the second display area are set side by side, privileges to a player at the occurrence of big winning are different between the first start storage and the second start storage, the standby reservation display means displays whether to be a reservation image corresponding to the first start storage or a reservation image corresponding the second start storage in an identifiable manner, and the consumption reservation display means displays whether to be the reservation image corresponding to the first start storage or the reservation image corresponding to the second start storage in an unidentifiable manner.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium such as a game ball.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a special game advantageous to the player is executed when the variable display game is executed based on the winning of a game ball at the starting port and the variable display game results in a special result. What can generate a state is common.

  In such a gaming machine, the first start memory is stored based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the second start memory is stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. There is also known a game in which the start display memory and the second start storage are digested in the storage order to execute a variable display game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-140297 A

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, the degree of advantage for the player is different between the first start memory and the second start memory, so the type of start memory used for the variable display game is changed. There was a problem that the player became too conscious and attenuated the interest of the game.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player enjoy the variable display game being executed regardless of the type of the start memory. An object is to provide a possible gaming machine.

  A typical embodiment of the present invention is a special game advantageous to a player when a variable display game is executed on a display unit based on a winning of a game ball at a start opening, and the variable display game gives a special result. In the gaming machine capable of generating a state, the start opening includes a first start opening and a second start opening, and the display unit includes a first display area and a second display area aligned with the first display area. Is set, and a first start storage means capable of storing a first start memory serving as a right to execute the variable display game generated based on a winning of a game ball to the first start opening, and the second Second start storage means capable of storing a second start memory as a right to execute the variable display game generated based on a winning of a game ball at the start port, the first start memory and the second start The memory is digested in the order of winning and the variable display game is executed. And a variable display game executing means capable of displaying the hold image corresponding to the first start memory and the hold image corresponding to the second start memory arranged in the first display area in the order of the winnings. Standby hold display means, and a digest hold display means capable of displaying a hold image indicating start memory provided for execution of the variable display game in the second display area, the first start memory The player is more advantageous when a special game state occurs as a result of the variable display game based on the second start-up memory than when a special game state occurs as a result of the variable display game based on The standby hold display means displays the hold image corresponding to the first start memory or the hold image corresponding to the second start memory so as to be identifiable, It is characterized by indiscernible displays whether a pending image corresponding to whether the second start memory is reserved image corresponding to the first start-up storage.

  According to one representative aspect of the present invention, it is possible to reduce the player's awareness of the type of start-up memory and improve the interest of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of the 1st embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of the game board of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bit transposition pattern of the random number of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the checksum calculation process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial value random number update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the input process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the switch reading process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the output process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the payout command transmission process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fraud & winning prize monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning number counter update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the command setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game state check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the payout busy signal check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure pending | holding information determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big winning opening switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol fluctuation | variation control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2 byte distribution process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation process transfer setting process (special figure 1) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process transfer setting process (special figure 2) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure display process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure display process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 of the fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation mode information check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 (at the time of completion of time reduction) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the top prize winning opening and closing pattern of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the lower special prize opening opening / closing pattern of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the fanfare / interval process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the process during a fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the solenoid information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process 1 during the special winning opening opening of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process 2 during the special winning opening opening of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big winning opening opening of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process 3 during the special winning opening opening of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big winning opening remaining ball process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process 2 during the fanfare / interval of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the usual game process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the usual figure normal process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process in the common figure change of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during common figure change of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process in the normal map display of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the normal map display of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process during a normal figure of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a common figure of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the general electric operation transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the general electric power remaining ball process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process shift setting process of the common figure of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED edit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the radio wave fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the external information edit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main prize ball signal edit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port signal edit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process of the modification 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number circuit monitoring process of the modification 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process of the modification 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game process of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation process of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED edit process of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process (sub side) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variable system command processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change effect setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the notice lottery process in the first half variation of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the notice lottery process in the latter half change of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch type | system | group command processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the normal system hold icon of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the special type | system | group hold icon of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a hold display unit case, (A) is a figure with a hold display unit in an initial position, (B) is a figure with a hold display unit in a production position, (C) is the 4th hold display part opened. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 reservation notice setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the pending | holding change notice determination table of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a pending change notice determination table 1, (B) is a figure explaining the pending change notice determination table 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the hold change timing determination table of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a hold change timing determination table 1, (B) is a hold change timing determination table 2, (C) is a hold change. It is a figure explaining the timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 hold display process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half of the mechanical reservation advance notice execution process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half of the mechanical reservation advance notice execution process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the reserved storage area of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a figure explaining the structure of a special figure 1 reserved storage area, (B) is a figure of a special figure 2 reserved storage area FIG. 7C is a diagram for explaining the structure, and FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining the structures of the digestion pending storage areas and the standby pending storage areas 1 to 4 of FIG. It is a figure explaining the notice suggestion character of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram explaining the operation | movement of the holding | maintenance display unit in case this production | presentation of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed, and the display of the beginning of the lower part of a screen. It is a transition diagram explaining the operation of the hold display unit and the display of the middle board 1 at the bottom of the screen when the main effect of the first embodiment of the present invention is executed. It is a transition diagram explaining the operation of the hold display unit and the display of the middle board 2 at the bottom of the screen when the main effect of the first embodiment of the present invention is executed. It is a transition diagram explaining the operation | movement of the holding | maintenance display unit in case this production | presentation of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is performed, and the display of the last stage of a screen lower part. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of a holding | maintenance display unit and the display of a screen lower part in case a gaze effect is performed by the raising / lowering operation | movement of the holding | maintenance display unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of a holding | maintenance display unit and the display of a screen lower part in case a gasse effect is performed by the notice suggestion character of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the holding | maintenance display unit case in which the holding | maintenance display unit of the modification 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention exists in an initial position. It is sectional drawing of the holding | maintenance display unit case and display apparatus of the modification 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the display apparatus and hold display unit of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the holding | maintenance display unit of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 reservation notice setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the notice character determination table of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the notice character of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 hold display process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the holding | maintenance display unit of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the center case of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the light emission color of the holding | maintenance display part of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and a holding | maintenance icon. It is a front view in the center case in the non-electric support state of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the center case at the time of the electric support transfer of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 reservation notice setting process of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the pending | holding change notice determination table of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a pending change notice determination table 1, (B) is a figure explaining the pending change notice determination table 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pending | holding display process of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory operation | movement process of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect light emission part lighting process of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the pending | holding storage area of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram explaining the operation | movement of the first half of the movable production | presentation member and holding | maintenance display part in the electric support of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram explaining the operation | movement of the second half of the movable production | presentation member and holding | maintenance display part in the electric support of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the lighting operation of the holding | maintenance display part of the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the holding | maintenance display unit in the state in which the holding | maintenance display part of the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention has not failed. It is a front view of a hold display unit in the state where the 2nd hold display part of modification 2 of a 3rd embodiment of the present invention has failed. It is a front view of the game board of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the start winning opening unit of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the combination of the 1st game state and the 2nd game state of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the center case in the 1st game state of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the center case in the 2nd game state of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch type | system | group command processing of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the hold icon of the 4th Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a figure explaining a normal system hold icon, (B) is a figure explaining a special system hold icon. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pending | holding advance notice setting process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the hold change notice determination table 1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a hold change notice determination table 1, (B) is a hold change notice determination table 2, (C) is a hold change. It is a figure explaining the notice determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pending | holding display process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition figure centering on the standby hold display area for demonstrating transition of the hold display of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation part operation | movement process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the transition of the opening stage of the production | presentation part of the 4th Embodiment of this invention, a movable production | presentation member, a screen, etc. It is a figure explaining transition of middle boards, such as an effect part of the 4th Embodiment of this invention, a movable effect member, and a screen. It is a figure explaining the transition of the final stage of the production | presentation part of the 4th Embodiment of this invention, a movable production member, a screen, etc. It is a figure explaining the display screen in the 2nd game state of the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the waiting hold display area and the digestion hold display area in the first gaming state of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is transition diagrams, such as a screen, explaining operations of the rendering unit and the movable rendering member in the second gaming state according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is transition diagrams, such as a screen explaining the operation | movement of a display part and a movable production | presentation member when the pseudo | simulation variation of the modification 3 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention generate | occur | produces. It is transition diagrams, such as a screen explaining the operation | movement of a display part and a movable production | presentation member when the pseudo | simulation variation of the modification 4 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention occurs. It is a figure explaining the notice suggestion character of the modification 5 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the change of the hold icon by the notice suggestion character of the modification 5 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pending | holding change effect process of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the center case of the 5th Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the state which has not validated the passage gate, (B) is a figure explaining the state in which the passage gate was validated. It is a front view in the center case of the 5th Embodiment of this invention, (C) is the state where the game ball passed the passing gate of an effective state, (D) is a figure explaining the state where the holding | maintenance icon changed. It is.

(First embodiment)
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of this invention.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a main body frame 11 fixed to an island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame is constituted by the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

  Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the fluctuation display game includes a special figure fluctuation display game and a common figure fluctuation display game. When the fluctuation display game is simply referred to as a fluctuation display game, in this specification, the special figure fluctuation display game is indicated.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

  Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a state where a probability of occurrence of a special result (big hit) is high (probable change state) or a big hit state (special gaming state) in a specific gaming state (normal power support state or short-time state) It is.

  Here, the probability variation state is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games are executed (number-of-times type), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. There is something that continues until it is finished (falling lottery type).

  In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases.

  The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a plate-like game board main body 30a serving as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. A display device 41 is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which the game balls passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. It has been. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game balls that roll on the stage portion 40b enter the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The top effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  Three general winning holes 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning hole 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of game balls in the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35 a to 35 n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal variation winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a pair of movable members (movable pieces) 37b whose upper side is opened in an inverted “C” shape and converted into a state in which game balls can easily flow. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure changing display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The pair of movable members 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 normally holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning opening 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be awarded to the normal variation winning device 37 when the movable member 37b is closed. .

  The movable member 37b opens in the shape of a reverse “C” via the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal-variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, and the game ball is It changes to the open state (a winning easy state advantageous to the player) that tends to flow into the normal variation winning device 37.

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of an easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the normal variation display game or setting the probability of hitting the general variation display game to be higher than usual. The above-mentioned specific gaming state (general power support state, short-time state) is generated by making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in.

  In the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37, an attacker opens the first big winning port by rotating the upper end side to the front side by the big winning port solenoid 1 (38b) (see FIG. 3). A first special variable winning device 38 having an open / close door 38c in the form is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state where the big prize opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the first big prize opening. Note that a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the first grand prize opening as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.

  Further, in the game area 32 at the upper left of the center case 40, a pair of prize winning opening solenoids 2 (39b) (see FIG. 3) are opened in a reverse “C” shape to open the second winning prize opening. A second special variable winning device 39 having a movable member 39c is provided. Similar to the first special variable prize-winning device 38, the second special variable prize-winning device 39 is in a state in which the big prize opening is closed (blocked state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (player). A special gaming state advantageous to the player), and by allowing the game ball to easily flow into the second big prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. An upper count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the second grand prize opening as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.

  When a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the first special winning opening of the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the second large winning opening of the second special variable winning apparatus 39. The payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning a prize from the payout device to the upper plate 21. The game area 32 below the first special variable winning device 38 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display unit) 51 and a second special figure fluctuation display unit (figure display unit) (figure display game) composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Special figure 2 display) 52, a fluctuation display section (common figure display) 53 for a common figure fluctuation display game, and a memory display section for notifying the start (hold) memory count of each fluctuation display game (special figure 1 hold) A display 54, a special figure 2 holding display 55, and a universal drawing holding display 56).

  Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and lights up when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state. A second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator) 58, and a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. A status display (probability status display section) 59 and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are provided.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the general map variation display game and the special map variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, wins the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, or the second special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32 Is done. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of the winning winning port. The prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 through the payout device.

  The normal start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been executed and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or the result of the normal map variable display game is normal When the variable winning device 37 has been converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 34, if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1).

  In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

  The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

  When the common figure random number value extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is converted. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 are detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball won at the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game and is stored as a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball won at the normal variable prize winning device 37 is shown in FIG. It is detected as the start winning ball of the variable display game, and stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

  When detecting the starting winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning at the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are played by stopping and displaying a predetermined result form after the identification information is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the decoration special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest.

  When a game ball is won at the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

  At this time, the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the second special variable prize winning device 39 are energized to the big prize opening solenoid 1 (38b) and the big prize opening solenoid 2 (39b) (see FIG. 3) to thereby win the big prize opening. Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the big prize opening provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player opens many game balls. The privilege that it can be acquired is given.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

  As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure change display game is ready to be executed, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (38a , 39a) includes a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 including an input port, an output unit 130 including an output port and a driver, and the like.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference for a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and there is a possibility that a special result mode is derived (differing expected value). As reach effects, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2-reach (SP2 reach), special 3-reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in a variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display with reach and non-reach display, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game, etc. And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111a obtains any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a displays the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do. Here, when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to and supplied from a gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. There are provided interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

  The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Therefore, it is possible to detect an abnormal state such as a floating state, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

  Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a fraud signal fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy. A signal is also input. The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. Signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 and the like from the payout control device 200. A data including a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball break switch signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 A first input port 122 for supplying to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the bus 140 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid for opening the second special variable winning device 39). 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening 39b and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the big prize opening solenoid 1 (38b), the big prize opening solenoid 2 (39b), and the general power solenoid 37c outputted from the second output port 134, and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs, a second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the port 136, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 serving as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure A possible FeRAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, turns on the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) includes a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a change command, a stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 via the command I / F 331. As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111b. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a hit / decision of the normal variation display game is determined.

  Then, the universal symbol display game is displayed on the universal symbol display device, after the identification symbol is varied and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped. When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  In addition, the start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the big hit of the first special figure variation display game is based on the starting storage. A random number for determination is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed.

  Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the start memory, the big hit determination disturbance of the second special figure variable display game is stored. A numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the second special figure variation display game has been hit or lost.

  Then, the CPU 111 a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result state on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b or the movable of the second special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b. The member 39c is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening.

  Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short-time state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short-time operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is.

  Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in which the opening time (general power opening time) is the normal state. It is possible to perform control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 ms).

  Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In addition, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The main process is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Subsequently, an interrupt vector setting process for setting a jump destination vector address when an interrupt occurs is executed (A1002), and further, a stack for setting a stack pointer that is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs. Pointer setting processing is executed (A1003).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1004). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1005), and executes an interrupt mode setting process for setting an interrupt process mode (A1006).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from game control apparatus 100 serving as main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the computer starts normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control apparatus 100 performs the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Determine (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

  In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time has ended, the game control apparatus 100 reads out and writes RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (the result of A1016 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process in the case of normal recovery from a power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1026 in FIG. 5B and the initialization process is executed. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. After that, the game control apparatus 100 examines an area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the gaming state is not a high probability state (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 skips the processing of Step A1023 and Step A1024 and proceeds to the processing of Step A1025. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1023), for example, a high probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 50 (Error indicator) ON (lighted) data is saved in the segment area (A1024). And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to rationally perform the below-mentioned special figure game process is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (A1025), and step A1031 Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when the processing of step A1026 is executed after execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the process of step A1031.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step A1025 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in step A1030 include the model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and the suspension of special figures 1 and 2. A decoration special figure 1 holding number command indicating a number and a decoration special figure 2 holding number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

  The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1031, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, the CPU 111a performs setting of a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the bit transposition pattern according to the first embodiment of this invention. For example, as shown in FIG. 6, the bit transposition pattern is a different bit arrangement (placement after bit transposition in the lower stage) by replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (placement before the bit transposition in the upper stage) in a predetermined order. ) Is a pattern that defines how to replace the data when it is stored.

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the random number bits according to the bit transposition pattern shown in FIG. 6, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) The initial value (start value) of the random number 1, the big hit symbol random number 2), and the random number (win random number) that determines the hit of the normal figure is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1033), and an interrupt is permitted (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing).

  In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number goes around. Each random number may be updated by a counter by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without overlapping until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step A1035, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of checking by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and monitoring the power failure. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process of step A1035. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1035) (A1034), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process of step A1035 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. Determine (A1038). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1039) and off-data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is executed (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

  In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) operable from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a checksum calculation processing procedure according to the first embodiment of this invention. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as a calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (A1107).

  If the checksum calculation has not ended (the result of A1107 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is terminated.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the winning initial value random number by +1 (A1201) and updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1202). Then, the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (A1203), and the initial value random number update process is terminated.

  Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game. Also, “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of special figure 1, and “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is a random number that determines the big hit symbol that is special hit 2 It is a random number that is the initial value.

  As described above, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first saves the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM (A1301). In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing for inputting from various sensors and switches and capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1302). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, general electric solenoid 37c) is executed (A1303). If a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1004 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. .

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 (A1304), and further, random number update process 1 (A1305), random number update Process 2 (A1306) is executed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, the upper count switch 39a, A prize opening switch / status monitoring process for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is executed (A1307).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variable display game (A1308), and subsequently executes a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general figure variable display game (A1309). . Details of the special game process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the usual game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1310). Details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1311). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1312). Details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1313). Details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the interrupt request (A1314). Finally, the register data saved in step A1301 is restored (A1315), an interrupt is permitted (A1316), and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1302) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of input processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read state of the input port 1 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1404), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1405). Then, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1406), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (A1407), and the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares unused bit data (A1409), and prepares bit data to be inverted (A1410). Further, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (A1411), and the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (A1412). Thereafter, the switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the switch reading process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and saved in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area ( (A1504). Thereafter, the process waits until a delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and saved in the port input state 2 of the target switch control area ( (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same state bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (A1510), and the determinate bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed to confirm this time Bits are set (A1511).

  Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same status bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt The logical product with the definite state is calculated and used as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the current confirmed bit and the previous held bit and saves it as the current confirmed state (A1514). Further, an exclusive OR of the previous state and the final state is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process ends.

  If the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but in such a case, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that it cannot be determined correctly. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1303) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of output processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 outputs (resets) off-data to a port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the big prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604), and the acquired data is output to the digit output port 136 (A1605). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A1606), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (A1607).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the external information terminal 71, and outputs it to the external information output port 137 (A1608). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1609). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1610).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test fire test apparatus, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output (A1611). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1612). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1613), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1304) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of payout command transmission processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is classified by the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 13 winning balls, 14 winning balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the number of counts in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 receives a winning that is a check target among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers in all the winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

  When all the checks are completed (the result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A1710. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1704), and the target winning number counter The number of prize balls corresponding to the area is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls and the acquired number of prize balls are added and saved as a new number of remaining prize balls in the prize ball remaining area (A1706). In addition, as the value of the remaining prize ball area before the process of step A1706, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number serving as a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball number area is 10 or more, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for output of the main prize ball signal (A1707). If not 10 or more (the result of A1707 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1710. On the other hand, if the number is 10 or more (the result of A1707 is “Y”), a predetermined number 10 serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the prize ball remaining number area (A1708). Further, the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by 1 (A1709), and the process returns to step A1707.

  Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A1710), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (A1711). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1711 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1711 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status is idle (A1712).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status is information in which whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal is set in an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, payout Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  When the payout busy signal status is not in the idle state (the result of A1712 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the payout command transmission process. When not in an idle state, a busy state and an indefinite state are included. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  When the payout busy signal status is in the idle state (the result of A1712 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1713). In the process of checking whether the winning number counter area 1 has a count, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When there is no count number (the result of A1713 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area to be checked (A1714), and counts all the winning number counter areas. It is determined whether or not the number check is completed (A1715). If all checks are completed (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1715 is “N”), the process returns to step A1713, and the processes from step A1713 to A1715 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1713 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1716), and the target winning number counter A payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1717). Then, the payout command is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1718), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1719), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control apparatus 100 can start the payout control with a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) can start payout control. In this case, a prize ball command transmission means for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means is provided.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present embodiment, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general winning prize port 35, first special variable winning prize device 38, second prize provided in the gaming area 32 is controlled. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39), and paying out of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing control, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) To send the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Have However, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the award corresponding to the fact that the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. The ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) having different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

  In addition to performing overall game control, access to predetermined winning areas (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) that performs payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area. Including prize ball External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means, the payout control means The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning port 35, A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize-winning device 38 and the second special variable prize-winning device 39), and one prize ball when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And It is possible to store the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted by updating at the time of winning a game ball in a predetermined prize area and by updating in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of random number update processing 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1305 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random numbers, jackpot symbol random number 1, and jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801). When the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). .

  On the other hand, when the usual hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the hit random number initial value random number as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded ordinary random number is set in a register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804).

  When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A1807. On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “Y”), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the big hit symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “N”), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 2 is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of random number update processing 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2, 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both. Target and update every time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number to be updated from among a plurality of random numbers to be updated (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of a register in which a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as R register) is set (A1904). For example, the refresh register is used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the R register, and masks the value of the R register (A1905). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the value remaining by masking the value of the R register with the upper 1 byte as the addition value using the mask value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as “masked value”) and set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

  In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte as “0” as the addition value and sets the lower 1 byte. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is to prevent the masked value from being “0” and to prevent the value from changing by adding “0”.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “Y”), the value of the random number area to be updated (2 bytes) is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random value, and whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

  If the new random number value is not greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 places the new random value in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (A1914). A random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “N”), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random value (or a value if a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number update process 2 ends.

  In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111a determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the main process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the lower count switches 38a in the lower major prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) (A2001). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the fraud monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal Information of a winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), a winning mouth monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening monitoring table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning opening monitoring tables are prepared according to the respective switches to be monitored.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (A2003). Then, the illegal winning / winning monitoring process for monitoring the illegal winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004).

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a fraud monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 38) (A2005), monitors the illegal winning, and makes a normal winning. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process is executed (A2006).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fraud monitoring table for the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power (A2007), monitors fraud and wins and detects normal winning and fraud & winning monitoring. The process is executed (A2008).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that do not require fraud monitoring processing (A2009). The winning number counter updating process is executed to update (A2010).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored and which is to be monitored this time (A2011). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2013). Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2015).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2016 is “N”), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2016 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2017), and an error has occurred. A game machine state check process for determining the state of the machine is executed (A2018).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). The status monitoring process ends. Details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of fraud & prize winning monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, A2006, and A2008 in the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The fraud & winning monitoring process is performed for each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This process is performed. As for the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) and Fudenden (ordinary variable prize-winning device 37), it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening and closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  First, the game control device 100 checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error (A2101), and determines whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the lower count switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a. In addition, when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the usual hit.

  Then, when it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2103 is “N”), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the illegal winning number after addition is determined to be the fraudulent occurrence of the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number (for example, 5) has been exceeded (A2105).

  The reason why the number of judgments is five is that, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is won or a signal is noisy and not to be judged as illegal, and an error is not easily determined even though it is not illegal.

  When the number of determinations has not been exceeded (the result of A2105 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch (A2110). If the number of determinations is exceeded (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud occurrence determinations (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud generation command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud winning generation flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and the number of winnings for setting the winning ball Counter update processing is executed (A2111). Details of the winning counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), if the target notification timer is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the one lower count switch 38a, and is not allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud release command is prepared (A2116), and the fraud flag The illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared (A2117). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  The game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize winning monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

  In addition, the game control device 100 does not execute the processing of step A2119 or when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (the result of A2120 is “N”), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (A2121), and command setting processing is performed. Is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of winning number counter update processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2010 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 16 and in step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning port switches to be monitored from the winning port monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (more accurately, an input change) to the target winning port switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2211).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203) and sets the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). Further, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2205).

  If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2209). If no overflow occurs (the result of A2209 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the process of step A2206 is completed or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is “Y”), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (A2211).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2211 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns to the processing of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch. If all the switches have been monitored (the result of A2211 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Command setting processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of command setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2301) and reads the serial transmission buffer status (A2302). Further, it is determined whether or not a command is being transmitted (A2303).

  In addition, when the command is not being transmitted (result of A2303 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 initializes the transmission circuit because the circuit may be abnormal (A2304), and the command data (MODE (upper byte) ) Is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer (A2305).

  The game control device 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) in the serial transmission buffer after the processing of step A2305 or when the command is being transmitted (result of A2303 is “Y”) ( A2306).

  Further, the game control device 100 reads the serial transmission buffer status (A2307) and determines whether or not a command is being transmitted (A2308). If the command is being transmitted (the result of A2308 is “Y”), the command setting process is terminated.

  In addition, when the command is not being transmitted (result of A2308 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 initializes the transmission circuit because there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the circuit (A2309). Then, the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten in the serial transmission buffer (A2310), and the command setting process is terminated.

  As described above, since the command is transmitted to the production control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the command analysis can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure of gaming machine state check processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The gaming machine state check process is executed in steps A2013, A2015, and A2018 in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is the same as described in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the check target signal is ON (A2402). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2402 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2403), and a target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2404). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2405).

  On the other hand, when the check target signal is on (result of A2402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires the target state on command, and prepares (A2407). Further, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2408).

  When the process of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they do not match (the result of A2409 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). If the updated state monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2414). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (A2415 result is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2415 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, a command setting process is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a payout busy signal check process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2019 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2501). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2501 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets a busy state flag as the determination status (A2502). On the other hand, if the payout busy signal is not on (the result of A2501 is “N”), an idle state flag is set as the determination status (A2503). After the determination status is set, the previous busy signal data is loaded (A2504).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current signal is different from the previous signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change of ON or OFF (A2505). If the current signal is different from the previous signal (the result of A2505 is “Y”), the current signal state is saved as the previous busy signal data (A2506), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (A2507).

  The game control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 after the processing of step A2507 ends or when the current signal is not different from the previous signal (result of A2505 is “N”) (A2508).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time counted by the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the signal determination time (for example, 32 ms) (A2509). If the signal determination time has not been reached (the result of A2509 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. On the other hand, when the signal determination time is reached (the result of A2509 is “Y”), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1 and kept before the determination time (A2510), and the value of the busy signal status area is determined as the determination status. It is determined whether or not they match (A2511).

  When the value of the busy signal status area matches the determination status (the result of A2511 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the payout busy signal check process. If the determination status does not match (the result of A2511 is “N”), the determination status is saved in the busy signal status area (A2512), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By the payout busy signal check process, a busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special game process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is made. Prior to the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 or the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. . Details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (A2603). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (A2604).

  When the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the special figure game process number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Then, the return address after the branch process ends is saved in the stack area (A2607), and the game branch process is executed according to the game process number (A2608).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A2608, the game control device 100 monitors the start of change of the special figure change display game, sets the start of change of the special figure change display game, sets the effect, A special figure normal process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2609). Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A2608, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure stop display time, special information for performing special figure display processing, and the like. The process during figure change is executed (A2610). Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A2608, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of jackpot or sets each jackpot if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot. A special chart display process is executed to set the fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening pattern, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process (A2611). Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A2608, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, and processes information necessary for performing the big prize opening opening process. Processing during fanfare / interval for setting and the like is executed (A2612). Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53A and 53B.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A2608, the game control apparatus 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if the final round is, A process for opening a grand prize opening is performed to set information necessary for the process for remaining a big prize opening ball (A2613). Details of the special winning opening opening process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A2608, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is executed (A2614). Details of the winning prize remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “6” in step A2608, the game control apparatus 100 executes a big hit ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (A2615). Details of the big hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the game process number ends, the game control device 100 prepares a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2616), and then the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51. Is executed (A2617). And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2618), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed (A2619). Details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A2616 and performs the subsequent processing. Run.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of start port switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (start winning prize opening 36) (A2701), and then executes a special figure start opening switch common process (A2702). Details of the special figure start port switch common process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A2706.

  Next, the game control device 100 is in an open state in which the ordinary electric winning (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and a game ball can be won. It is determined whether or not (A2703). If the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2703 is “Y”), the processing after step A2705 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2703 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the ordinary electric fraud is occurring (A2704). In determining whether or not the ordinary power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) if the normal electric power fraud has not occurred (the result of A2704 is “N”) (A2705). . Subsequently, a special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2706), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. The details of the special figure start port switch common process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 ends the start-port switch monitoring process when the power transmission fraud is occurring (the result of A2704 is “Y”). That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start-port switch common processing (A2702, A2706) in the above-described start-port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure start port switch common process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2801). If there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (the result of A2801 is “N”), the special view start port switch common process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitored start port switch (the result of A2801 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2802). . If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2802 is “N”), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  In addition, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (A2803), The big hit random number extracted is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (A2804).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times of starting port signal output, which is the number of times, is loaded (A2805). Further, the value of the loaded start port signal output count is updated by +1 (A2806), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A2807).

  When the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2807 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the start port signal output number area of the RWM (A2808). On the other hand, if the output count overflows (the result of A2807 is “Y”), the process of step A2809 is executed without executing the process of step A2808.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure hold (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2809). If the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (the result of A2809 is “Y”), the number of special figure hold to be updated (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated by one (A2812). . Further, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared (A2813), and a command setting process is executed (A2814).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of special figure hold corresponding to the start switch to be monitored (A2815), and saves the big hit random number in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( A2816). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2817), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2818). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (A2819). Finally, the special figure hold information determination process is executed (A2820), and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. Details of the special figure hold information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, when the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2809 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) (A2810). Thereafter, a command setting process is executed (A2811), and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2820) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure hold information determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a condition for executing the prefetch effect is satisfied (A2901). If not satisfied (the result of A2901 is “N”), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. If the condition is satisfied (the result of A2901 is “Y”), the following processing relating to the prefetch effect is executed.

  Here, the case where the conditions for performing the pre-reading effect are satisfied means that the input of the start port switch in the process of step A2801 of the special-purpose start port switch common process (FIG. 24) is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. This is the case. Further, when the input of the start port switch in the process of step A2801 of the special-purpose start port switch common process is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the opening extension function of the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation, that is, , When the time is not short, and when the jackpot (special gaming state) is not.

  If the game control apparatus 100 satisfies the condition for executing the prefetch effect (the result of A2901 is “Y”), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value or not A jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the determination result is a jackpot (A2903). Details of the jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch (A2904). Further, the jackpot symbol random number is checked to obtain the corresponding jackpot stop symbol pattern (A2905), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern region (A2907).

  On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A2903 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a stop symbol pattern (A2906) and saves the stop symbol pattern in the pre-read stop symbol pattern area (A2906). A2907).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern (A2908), and executes command setting processing (A2909).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A2910). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a second half variation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target start-up switch (A2911), and executes variation pattern setting processing for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A2912). . Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A2913). Thereafter, command setting processing is executed (A2914), and the special figure hold information determination processing is terminated. Note that the special figure information setting process in step A2910 and the variation pattern setting process in step A2912 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process described later.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the player can obtain the result related information before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. Can be notified.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening (the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39) is open, that is, whether or not it is in the special gaming state. (A3001). When the special winning opening is not open (the result of A3001 is “N”), the special winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, when the big prize opening is open (the result of A3001 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 counts the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. Is set to 0 (A3002). Then, it is determined whether or not the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state where the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (A3003). ).

  When the lower prize winning opening is open (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round. (A3004). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3004 is “Y”), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, when the winning prize remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3004 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the lower winning prize switch 1 (one lower count switch 38a). Is determined (A3005). If there is no input to the lower prize winning switch 1 (the result of A3005 is “N”), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower prize winning switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (A3009). .

  In addition, when there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 1 (the result of A3005 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the winning counter by +1 (A3006), and prepares a lower big prize opening count command. (A3007). Then, command setting processing is executed (A3008), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (A3009).

  When there is no input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3009 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the prize counter is 0 (A3018). When there is an input to the lower prize winning switch 2 (the result of A3009 is “Y”), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3010), and the lower prize winning count command is prepared (A3011). Then, a command setting process is executed (A3012), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3018).

  On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the lower major prize opening is not open (the result of A3003 is “N”), that is, the upper major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (second). In the case of a special game state in which the special variable winning device 39 is opened), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (upper count switch 39a) (A3013). If there is no input to the top prize winning opening switch (the result of A3013 is “N”), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, when there is an input to the upper prize winning opening switch (the result of A3013 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (A3014). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3014 is “N”), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3015), and an upper winning ticket count command is prepared (A3016).

  In addition, when the winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (the result of A3014 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an upper winning prize count command (A3016). Thereafter, command setting processing is executed (A3017), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3018). In the case of the top prize winning opening, the top prize winning count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball in order to produce an effect by winning.

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3018 is “N”), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of large winning mouth counts (A3019).

  Further, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of the big winning count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (A3020). When the number of the big prize mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3020 is “N”), the big prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, the game control device 100, when the number of winning prize count reaches or exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3020 is “Y”), keeps the number of winning prize count at the upper limit (A3021), and the special game The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3022). Then, a pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (A3023), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (A3024), and then the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control processing (A2617, A2619) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the symbol variation control process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure. (A3101).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is fluctuating as a result of the check (A3102), and when the special figure fluctuating flag is fluctuating (result of A3102) Is “Y”), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (A3103). Further, of the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer according to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (A3104), and the value of the timer is 0, that is, It is determined whether the time is up (A3105).

  When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (the result of A3105 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area (A3108). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (the result of A3105 is “Y”), the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (A3106). Furthermore, among the first special figure and the second special figure, the fluctuation symbol number related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (A3107), and corresponds to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area. Display data to be acquired is acquired (A3108). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A3111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (the result of A3102 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 displays a symbol display table (for example, the first special figure) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure). (For stop) is acquired (A3109). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol number area is acquired (A3110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A3111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. It becomes.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (A2609) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure routine processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206).

  Then, when the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3211). If the customer waiting demo has not been started (the result of A3211 is “N”), the customer waiting demo flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3212).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command (A3213) and executes a command setting process (A3214). Further, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A3215), and then the special figure normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3211 is “Y”), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (A3215) is executed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

  Here, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” related to the special figure routine process as the process number (A3301). Subsequently, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3302), and the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3303). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A3304), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A3305). Thereafter, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the special figure routine processing in FIG. When the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the updated special figure 2 hold number (-1) ( A3202), command setting processing is executed (A3203). Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (A3204), the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process of special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and then the special figure ordinary process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process of special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the updated special figure 1 hold number. The command setting process is executed (A3208). Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (A3209), the special figure fluctuation in-process transition setting process of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and then the special figure ordinary process is terminated. Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the special-figure changing process transition setting process of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  At the time of performing the process for preparing the decoration special figure holding number command (A3207, A3202), the subtraction number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure variation display game, and the current special figure 1 holding number or special number is not subtracted. A reserve number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the hold number in FIG. 2 is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the fluctuation start information setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3209) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3204) (see FIG. 38). This processing is executed in step A4211.

  Thus, by performing the special figure 2 hold count check before the special figure 1 hold count check, if the special figure 2 hold count is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3204) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3209) in the special figure usual process described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set ( A3405).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game (A3406). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Finally, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the first special figure change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the shift information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3501). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3502). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value according to whether or not the jackpot determination value is a jackpot (A3503). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (A3504). If it is a big hit (the result of A3504 is “Y”), the big hit that saved the outlier information in the process of step A3501 The big hit information is overwritten and saved in the flag 1 area (A3505), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (the result of A3504 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (A2902, A3503) in the special figure hold information determination process (FIG. 25) and the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 31) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for jackpot determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3601), and determines whether or not the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3602). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3602 is “Y”), that is, the game control device 100 sets a difference as the determination result (A3607). The process ends.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3602 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A3603). If the state is a high probability state (the result of A3603 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (A3604). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3603 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (A3605).

  When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3606). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3606 is “Y”), that is, when it is out of place, the difference is set as the determination result (A3607). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3606 is “N”), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (A3608). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A3701). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A3701 is “Y”), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number) 1) is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A3702). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A3703), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A3704). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot stop symbol information table (A3705), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A3706). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the probability variation determination flag area (A3707). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the round number upper limit information area (A3708), and acquires the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number. Is saved in the special prize opening opening information area (A3709). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A3701 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A3710), and stops the loss. The symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A3711).

  When the process of step A3709 or step A3711 ends, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A3712). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (A3713), and executes the command setting process (A3714). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Finally, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A3715), and clears the special symbol 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (A3716). ). Thereafter, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (A3404) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the special drawing time reduction (time reduction state) (A3801). If the special drawing time is not short (the result of A3801 is "N"), the normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (A3802). On the other hand, if the special drawing time is short (the result of A3801 is “Y”), the time variation changing pattern selection group information table is set (A3803).

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure holding number corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag (A3804), acquires the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure holding number, and saves it in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. (A3805). Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of start memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a distribution base pointer table (A3806), and acquires a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A3807). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (A3808), and the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (A3809). Thereafter, the special figure information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting processing (A3406, A4306) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 30) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 39) described later will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The fluctuation pattern includes a first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and a second half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a variation group selection address table (A3901), and acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 (A3902).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (A3903). If the production mode number is not less than 2 (the result of A3903 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (A3904). If the stop symbol pattern is not a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (the result of A3904 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3907.

  On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the production mode number is less than 2 (the result of A3903 is “Y”), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (the result of A3904 is “Y”). ), The address of the table corresponding to the variable distribution information 1 is acquired from the table prepared in the process of step A3902 (A3905). Further, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the second half fluctuation group (A3906).

  In the present embodiment, when the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number is also taken into consideration. Thus, by acquiring the address, the variation pattern selection mode varies depending on the number of start memories.

  The game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) (A3907), and executes a 2-byte distribution process (A3908). Further, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (A3909), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and prepared. (A3910). Further, the distribution process of the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A3911), and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A3912). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the first half variation group table (A3913), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (A3914). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A3915).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a random number from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the holding number 1) (A3916). Thereafter, a sorting process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A3917), the first half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half fluctuation number area (A3918), and the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte sorting process (A3908) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of 2-byte sorting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether or not the top data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is an unsorted code (ie, “0”) (A4001). It is determined whether there is no distribution (A4002).

  Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  When the first data of the second half variation group table is a code without distribution (the result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the data address corresponding to the distribution result (A4007). ) The 2-byte sorting process ends.

  On the other hand, when the first data of the second half variation group table is not a code with no distribution (the result of A4002 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 first distributes the distribution value specified in the second half variation group table. Is acquired (A4003).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in the process of step A4003 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A3907 of the change pattern setting process to obtain a new value. A random value is calculated (A4004). Further, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4005).

  When the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (result of A4005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4006), and the processing after step A4003 Execute. That is, the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired (A4003), the random value determined in step A4005 is subtracted as a new random value, and the new random value is subtracted. Is calculated (A4004). Then, each process is executed for the calculated new random number value until it is determined in step A4005 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4005 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table.

  When the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4005 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the data address corresponding to the result of distribution (A4007), 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the sorting process (A3911, A3917) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of distribution processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the prepared second half variation selection table (selection table) or first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (A4101), it is determined whether there is no allocation (A4102).

  Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  When the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (the result of A4102 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 addresses the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4107) and the distribution process ends.

  On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not an unsorted code (the result of A4102 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 displays the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. One sort value specified first is acquired (A4103).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4103 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 2 or the variation pattern random number 3) loaded in the processing of step A3910 or step A3916. A random value is calculated (A4104). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4105).

  When the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (result of A4105 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4106), and performs the processing after step A4103. Run. That is, the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4103), and the distribution value is subtracted using the random number value determined in step A4105 as a new random number value. A random value is calculated (A4104). The process is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4105 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table.

  Then, when the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4105 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (A4107), and performs the distribution process. Exit.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (A3407) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of change start information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4201). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4202), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4203). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (A4204), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (A4205).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A4206), and saves the addition value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4207). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (A4208), and further, a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (A4209). Then, command setting processing for transmitting the variable command is executed (A4210).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of special figure hold corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag by -1 (A4211), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (A4212). Further, the random number storage area is shifted (A4213), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A4214).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 first clears the stop extension information area as processing related to extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game (A4215). Then, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is off (A4126), whether or not the effect mode number is 2 (A4127), and whether or not the effect remaining rotational speed is 1 (A4128).

  Then, the game control device 100 has the stop symbol pattern as a stop symbol pattern (the result of A4216 is “Y”), the effect mode number is 2 (the result of A4217 is “Y”), and the effect mode. When the remaining number of rotations (number of games) at 1 is 1 (the result of A4218 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (A4219).

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the stop extension information 1 in the stop extension information area (A4220) when the special figure high probability is not in effect (the result of A4219 is “N”). Then, a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (A4222), and a command setting process is executed (A4223). Thereafter, the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time).

  In addition, when the special control probability is high (the result of A4219 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop extension information 2 in the stop extension information area (A4221). Then, a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (A4222), and a command setting process is executed (A4223). Thereafter, the variation start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time.

  On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100 determines that the stop symbol pattern is not a discontinuous stop symbol pattern (result of A4216 is “N”), the effect mode number is not 2 (result of A4217 is “N”), or the effect mode 2 If the remaining number of rotations (number of games) at 1 is not 1 (the result of A4218 is “N”), the variation start information setting process is terminated. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set.

  As described above, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. To be done. As a result, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3204) in the special figure usual process described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A4301). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is executed (A4302).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A4303). Further, special figure information setting processing (see FIG. 34) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is executed (A4304). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game, is prepared (A4305).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 35) for setting a variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game (A4306). Finally, a change start information setting process (see FIG. 38) for setting change start information of the second special figure change display game is executed (A4307), and the special figure 2 change start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A4302) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 31 is performed on the second start-up memory.

  The game control device 100 first saves the shift information in the big hit flag 2 area (A4401). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4402). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot determination process (see FIG. 32) for determining whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value according to whether or not it is a jackpot (A4403). If the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (the result of A4404 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the area of the big hit flag 2 where the lost information is saved in the process of step A4401 ( A4405) Thereafter, the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A4303) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In this process, the same process as that in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 33 is performed on the second start-up memory.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4501). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of holdings) 1) is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4502). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4503), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4504). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot stop symbol information table (A4505), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4506). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the probability variation determination flag area (A4507). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the round number upper limit information area (A4508), and acquires the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number. Is saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A4509). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (the result of A4501 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4510), and stops the loss. The symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4511).

  When the process of step A4509 or step A4511 is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4512). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (A4513), and executes the command setting process (A4514). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Finally, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4515), and clears the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the holding number 1) to 0 (A4516). ). Thereafter, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special-fluctuation changing process transition setting processing (special drawing 1) according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is executed in step A3210 in the special figure changing process transition setting process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “1” as the process number (A4601), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4602).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A4603), and saves a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4604). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A4605), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. 200 ms) is set (A4606). Thereafter, the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special-fluctuation changing process transition setting processing (special drawing 2) according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is executed in step A3205 in the special figure changing process transition setting process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “1” as the process number (A4701), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4702).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A4703), and saves a signal relating to the fluctuation start of FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4704). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4705), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area. 200 ms) is set (A4706). Thereafter, the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2610) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure changing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (A4801). If there is no stop extension information (the result of A4801 is “N”), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4802). Finally, a special figure display mid-process transition setting process is executed (A4806), and the special figure fluctuation mid-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is stop extension information (the result of A4801 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not it is stop extension information 1 (A4803). If it is the stop extension information 1 (the result of A4803 is “Y”), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4804).

  On the other hand, if the game control apparatus 100 is not the stop extension information 1 (the result of A4803 is “N”), that is, if it is the stop extension information 2, the special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) will be displayed. Save in the processing timer area (A4805).

  When the game control apparatus 100 sets the special figure extended display time in the special figure game process timer area, the game control apparatus 100 finally executes a special figure display process transition setting process (A4806), and ends the special figure changing process. Details of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display process transition setting process (A4806) in the special figure changing process described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure display mid-process transition setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a process number “2” related to the special figure display process (A4901), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4902).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the end of variation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4903), and further saves the signal related to the end of variation in FIG. A4904).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for output in the external information terminal (A4905).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable display game control information on the special figure 1 display 51. (A4906). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4907). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A2611) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure display processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first loads the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A5001), and clears the RWM big hit flag 2 area (A5002). Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit is set in the loaded big hit flag 2 (A5003).

  When the big hit flag 2 is set in the big hit flag 2 (the result of A5003 is “Y”), the game control device 100 clears the RWM big hit flag 1 area (A5008). Further, a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5009).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not set in the big hit flag 2 (the result of A5003 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the big hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. 1 is loaded (A5004), and the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (A5005). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit is set in the loaded big hit flag 1 (A5006).

  When the big hit flag 1 is set in the big hit flag 1 (the result of A5006 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs a test signal regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variable display game. Save in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5007).

  When the big hit flag 1 or big hit flag 2 is set, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit value table (A5010). Thereafter, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A5011). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5012).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (A5013), and executes a command setting process (A5014). Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the hit result in the normal variation display game and the special variation display game as the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (A5015), and the command setting process is executed. (A5016). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (A5017), and the command setting process is executed (A5018). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves in the external information output data area of the RWM the special winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game. (A5019). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game processing timer area (A5020).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (the first special variation winning apparatus 38 or the second special variable winning apparatus 39) corresponding to the large winning opening information (A5021). . Further, a fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the big winning opening information (A5022).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag (A5023), and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag saving area (A5024). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (A5025), and ends the special figure display process. Details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not set for the big hit flag 1 (the result of A5006 is “N”), that is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of relation, The effect mode information check process is executed (A5026). Details of the effect mode information check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 executes time-reduced variation number update processing for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state (A5027). Details of the time shortening fluctuation count update process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the game control device 100 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (see A5028, FIG. 29), and ends the special figure display process.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (A5025) in the special figure display process described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process (A5101), and saves the process number set in the special figure game process number area (A5102).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) in the external information output data area (A5103), and saves a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state in the test signal output data area. (A5104).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 clears the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (A5105). Further, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (A5106), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (A5107).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the variation symbol determination flag area (A5108), and turns off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state. Is cleared (A5109). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5110).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5111). Furthermore, the time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a short time state is cleared (A5112). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (A5113), and clears the remaining effect rotation speed area (A5114). Further, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (A5115). Finally, the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (A5116), and then the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (A5026) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the effect mode information check process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5201). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5201 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  In addition, when the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of A5201 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the remaining effect rotation that is the number of times that the special figure variable display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed. The number is updated by -1 (A5202), and it is determined whether the remaining number of rotations of the effect is 0 (A5203).

  In the case where the remaining number of rotations of the effect is 0 (the result of A5203 is “Y”), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 determines the effect mode information address table. Is set (A5204), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (A5205).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred and saves it in the effect mode number area (A5206), acquires the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and enters the effect remaining speed area. Save (A5207). Then, the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (A5208).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (A5209), and saves the command in the effect mode command area (A5210). Finally, a command setting process is executed (A5211), and the effect mode information check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the case where the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (the result of A5203 is “N”), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 causes the remaining effect rotation. It is determined whether or not the number is a specified rotational speed (for example, 8 times) (A5212). When the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (the result of A5212 is “N”), the effect mode information check process ends.

  In addition, when the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (result of A5212 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an effect mode switching preparation command (A5213), and executes command setting processing ( A5214) After that, the effect mode information check process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time reduction variation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number update process (A5027) in the above special figure display process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the time shortening variation frequency update process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (A5301). When the special figure high probability is in effect (the result of A5301 is “Y”), the time shortening variation number update process is terminated.

  In addition, when the special figure high probability is not in effect (the result of A5301 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in short time (short time state) (A5302). If the special drawing time is not short (the result of A5302 is “N”), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

  Further, when the special control time is short (the result of A5302 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the time reduction fluctuation count for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the short time state by −1. Then (A5303), it is determined whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations has become zero (A5304). When the time shortening variation number is not 0 (the result of A5304 is “N”), that is, when the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation number updating process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that the probability information command (when the time-short state ends in the current special-figure variation display game) when the time reduction variation count is 0 (the result of A5304 is “Y”). (Short time end) is prepared (A5305), and command setting processing is executed (A5306). After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) is executed (A5307), and the time shortening variation number update process is ended.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) is executed in step A5307 in the time-reduced variation number update process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of time reduction in the external information output data area (A5401) and the test signal output data area (A5402). Further, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (A5403), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the usual game mode flag area (A5404).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5405). Finally, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5406), and thereafter, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction) is terminated.

  Here, the types of special results and the opening / closing pattern of the special winning award (special variable winning device) in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG.

  There are four types of special results: 2R variation, 11R variation, 11R normal and 16R variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation and 16R probability variation are 2, 11, 16 rounds in the special gaming state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the special gaming state ends. This is a special result that is considered to be a short time. In addition, 11R normally has 11 rounds in the special gaming state, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and a special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). It is a special result that is in a short time until execution.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a lower grand prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) and an upper large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), each having a plurality of opening / closing patterns. . One opening / closing pattern is selected from the plurality of opening / closing patterns in accordance with the type of special result. In the following opening and closing patterns, the value shown as the opening time of the big winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round Closes the grand opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an opening / closing pattern of the upper prize winning opening (second special variation winning apparatus 39) according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The top prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 51 (a) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short time state. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, the opening time of 52 ms is set in the first round (1R), and the opening time of 52 ms is set in the next round (2R) after the interval time of 1448 ms. Then, after the ending time of 22400 ms elapses, the special game state ends.

  The top prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 51 (b) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the time is short when the special result is derived. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing mode as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern, but the ending time is 1400 ms.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 51 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, a round in which an opening time of 52 ms is set is 16 rounds with an interval time of 1448 ms, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 51 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, first, in the first round (1R), similarly to the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, the opening of 52 ms is performed 16 times with the closing time of 1448 ms. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, and the effect on the display device 41 is the same, making it difficult for the player to recognize which opening / closing pattern it is.

  Thereafter, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 during the closing time of 6300 ms to notify that it is the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, and the opening of 26168 ms is performed to finish the first round. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 51 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), first, 52 ms is opened, then 26948 ms is opened with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an opening / closing pattern of the lower prize winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The lower grand prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 52A is selected when the special result is 11R probability change or 11R normal. In the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), first, the opening is performed for 200 ms, then the opening is performed for 28000 ms with the closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 10 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 52 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 is the same as the opening / closing pattern of the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 and 3 until the end of the eleventh round, and the player performs the same opening / closing operation on the display device 41 etc. It is difficult to recognize whether it is a pattern. After the end of 11 rounds, a round in which an opening time of 200 ms is set with an interval time of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 52 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 or 2 until the end of the 11th round, and the player performs any opening / closing operation on the display device 41 or the like. It is difficult to recognize whether it is a pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 at an interval time of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 is present. Thereafter, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval time of 2000 ms, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2612) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. FIGS. 53A and 53B are flowcharts showing a procedure of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the special gaming state by +1 (A5501), and whether or not the special winning opening information is the upper special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) opening / closing patterns 1 to 3. Is determined (A5502).

  When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (the result of A5502 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 controls the control pointers corresponding to the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3. (S (start value), E (end value)) are set (A5509), and the process proceeds to step A5520 (FIG. 53B).

  By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing of the big winning opening and the time in one round based on the big winning opening control table. In the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. The round command corresponding to the number is not transmitted.

  In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (the result of A5502 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. Then, command setting processing is executed (A5504).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the started round is the first round (1R) (A5505). If it is the first round (the result of A5505 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) opening / closing pattern (A5506). ).

  When the winning prize opening information is the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A5506 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern. (S, E) is set (A5510), and the process proceeds to step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  In addition, in the case where the big prize opening information is not the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A5506 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the big winning opening opening information is the upper big prize opening / closing pattern 4 or not. It is determined whether or not (A5507).

  The game control device 100 corresponds to the first round (1R) of the top prize opening / closing pattern 4 when the top prize opening information is the top prize opening / closing pattern 4 (the result of A5507 is “Y”). The control pointer (S, E) is set (A5508), and the process proceeds to step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  Further, the game control device 100 corresponds to the first round (1R) of the top prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 when the winning prize opening information is not the top winning prize opening / closing pattern 4 (the result of A5507 is “N”). The control pointer (S, E) to be set is set (A5511), and the process proceeds to step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (the result of A5505 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the started round is 2 to 11 rounds ( A5512). When the rounds to be started are 2 to 11 rounds (the result of A5512 is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (A5513).

  Then, the game control device 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the 2nd to 11th rounds of the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern when the big winning opening opening information is not the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (the result of A5513 is “N”). (S, E) is set (A5514), and the process proceeds to step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  In addition, when the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (the result of A5513 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern. (S, E) is set (A5515), and the process proceeds to step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  In addition, when the starting round is not 2 to 11 rounds (the result of A5512 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern. (A5516). If the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (the result of A5516 is “Y”), control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are displayed. The setting is made (A5515), and the process proceeds to step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  In addition, in the case where the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A5516 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the winning prize opening information is the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 or not. It is determined whether or not (A5517).

  When the winning prize opening information is the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (the result of A5517 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 controls the control pointer corresponding to the 12th round and later of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2. (S, E) is set (A5518), and the process proceeds to step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (the result of A5517 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 performs control corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 3. The pointer (S, E) is set (A5519), and the process proceeds to step A5520 in FIG. 53B.

  When the control pointer of the big prize opening / closing pattern is set (A5509, A5510, A5511, A5514, A5515, A5519), the game control device 100 saves the start value (S) of the control pointer in the big hit control pointer area ( A5520), the end value (E) is saved in the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (A5521). Subsequently, solenoid information setting processing is executed (A5522). Details of the solenoid information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (A5523). When the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A5523 is “Y”), the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5524), and the fanfare / interval process is executed. finish. Details of the process for setting the transition to the special winning opening opening process transition process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the big prize opening information is not the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (the result of A5523 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 2 (A5525). The fanfare / interval processing is terminated. Details of the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. One of the opening / closing patterns shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 is set by the above processing.

[Solenoid information setting process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of solenoid information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.
The solenoid information setting process is executed at step A5522 in the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a big winning opening control address table (A5601), and acquires an address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit control pointer (A5602).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires the output data and saves it in the prize winning solenoid output data area (A5603). Finally, acquires the opening / closing time value and saves the special-purpose game processing timer area (A5604). The solenoid information setting process is terminated. With this process, the opening and closing of the special winning opening and its time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the process for setting a process for setting a special prize opening opening process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special winning opening open process transition setting process 1 is executed in step A5524 in the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (A5701), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A5702). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (A5703), and information on the big winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (A5704). Finally, the lower big prize opening controlling flag is saved in the big prize opening discrimination flag area (A5705), and the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during the special prize opening opening according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is executed in step A5525 in the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (A5801), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A5802). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the upper prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (A5803), and the information of the big winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (A5804). Finally, an upper prize winning control flag is saved in the special prize opening discrimination flag area (A5805), and the special prize opening open process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (A2613) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the special winning opening opening process of the present embodiment.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the control pointer during the big hit by +1 (A5901), and further determines whether or not the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (A5902).

  When the value of the control pointer has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (the result of A5902 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a solenoid information setting process (A5909, see FIG. 54). Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. After that, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening open process transition setting process 3 (A5910), and ends the special winning opening open process.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process of the present embodiment. The big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process is executed in step A5908 in the big winning opening releasing process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball process (A6001), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A6002). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6003).

  Then, the game control device 100 turns off the large winning opening solenoid 38b or 39b to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the movable member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39. The data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A6004), and then the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 3]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process for setting the transition process 3 during the special winning opening in the present embodiment. The special prize opening open process transition setting process 3 is executed in step A5910 in the special prize opening open process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (A6101). Then, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A6102), and then the special winning opening open process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (A2614) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a special winning opening remaining ball process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM. (A6201).

  Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (the result of A6201 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 specially indicates the number of rounds and the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information. The game processing timer area is saved (A6202). Furthermore, the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 is executed (A6203), and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated. Details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The interval time is set to the time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms for the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it is 1448 ms.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (the result of A6201 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. The game mode flag is loaded from the flag save area (A6204). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (A6205). Then, the big hit end process transition setting process is executed (A6206), and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended. Details of the jackpot end process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses.

  For example, when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the time-saving state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the effect mode selected in other than the time-short state, the upper prize opening opening / closing is selected For pattern 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 22400 ms, including 1380 ms that is spent as the extra winning ball remaining ball processing time before the ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period.

  Also, when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the production mode selected in the short time when the special result is derived, the upper prize opening opening / closing is selected. For pattern 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 1400 ms, including 1380 ms that is spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of fanfare / interval process transition setting processing 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 is executed in step A6203 in the big winning opening remaining ball process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process (A6301), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6302).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of opening of the lower grand prize opening (first special variable prize winning apparatus 38) in the test signal output data area (A6303), and the upper large prize opening (second special variable prize winning). A signal relating to the end of opening of the apparatus 39) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6304). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (A6305), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end process transition setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The big hit ending process transition setting process is executed in step A6206 in the big winning opening remaining ball process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “6” as the process number related to the big hit end process (A6401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6402). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of opening of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6403), and the opening end of the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is saved. The signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the information of the number-of-wins count area that stores the number of winnings to the prize-winning mouth (A6405), and clears the information of the number-of-rounds area that stores the number of rounds of the special gaming state (A6406). Further, the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (A6407).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the information in the round number upper limit information area that stores the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds (A6408), and stores the big prize that stores the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening. The information in the mouth opening information area is cleared (A6409).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the control jack area during the big hit for setting the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening (A6410), and stores the end value of the control pointer during the big win during the big hit control pointer upper limit area. Is cleared (A6411). Finally, the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (A6412), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (A2615) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 is set when the probability variation determination flag that is set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the current special gaming state becomes a high probability state after the special gaming state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability data (A6501).

  If the game control apparatus 100 does not have high probability data (the result of A6501 is “N”), it executes jackpot end setting processing 1 (A6502). Details of the jackpot end setting process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is high-probability data (the result of A6501 is “Y”), the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6503). Details of the jackpot end setting process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the jackpot end setting process 1 or the jackpot end setting process 2 ends, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (A6504), and executes the command setting process (A6505). .

  Next, the process which saves information required for management of effect mode in the game control apparatus 100 is performed. Specifically, the game control device 100 first sets an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A6506). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (A6507).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state, and saves it in the effect remaining rotation speed area (A6508). Further, the next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (A6509).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (A6510). Subsequently, the prepared command is saved in the effect mode command area (A6511), and command setting processing is executed (A6512). Finally, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is executed (A6513), and the big hit ending process is terminated. Details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end setting processing 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The jackpot end setting process 1 is executed in step A6502 in the jackpot end process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (A6601), and further saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (A6602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the ordinary high probability & ordinary power support flag in the ordinary game mode flag area (A6603), and further saves the special low probability & hourly flag in the special game mode flag area. (A6604).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the probability information command (short time) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A6605), and further saves the initial value (for example, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation count in the time reduction fluctuation count area. (A6606). Thereafter, the jackpot end setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of jackpot end setting processing 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in step A6503 in the jackpot end process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start of high probability in the external information output data area (A6701), and further saves a signal related to the start of high probability in the test signal output data area (A6702).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (A6703), and further saves the special figure high probability & hourly flag in the special figure game mode flag area. (A6704).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A6705), and further clears the time reduction variation count area (A6706). Thereafter, the jackpot end setting process 2 ends.

  By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived. That is, the specific game in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is executed in step A6513 in the jackpot end process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number related to the special figure routine process (A6801), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6802).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the external information output data area (A6803), and further saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6804). Subsequently, information on the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (A6805), and further, information on the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (A6806).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the number in the game time display number area (A6807), and saves the fraud monitoring period flag in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6808). Finally, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6809), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the usual game process (A1309) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the usual game process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A6901). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general power prize switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A6902). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, if the usual game process timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A6903). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become 0 (A6904).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (the result of A6904 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the ordinary game process number to A general game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A6905).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A6906). Then, after the return address after the branch process is completed is saved in the stack area (A6907), the process is branched according to the game process number (A6908).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A6908, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the normal figure display game, sets the start of change of the normal figure display game, sets the effect, The usual figure usual process which performs the setting of the information required in order to perform the process during the usual figure change is executed (A6909). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A6908, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A6910). Details of the process during normal map change will be described later with reference to FIG. 73A.

  In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A6908, the game control device 100 determines whether the game is in the short-time state if the result of the general-purpose variable display game is successful. A general map display process for setting an open time and setting information necessary for performing the normal map processing is executed (A6911). Details of the processing for displaying a normal map will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A6908, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the process during the normal map or performing the ordinary electric ball remaining process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A6912). Details of the normal processing during the normal drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A6908, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general electric ball remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing a normal game end process (A6913). ). The details of the ordinary figure remaining sphere process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78A.

  In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A6908, the game control apparatus 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A6909). (A6914). Details of the normal hit processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 79A.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A6915). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A6916), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the normal game process timer is not 0 (the result of A6904 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes after step A6915.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A6901 in the usual game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7001). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7001 is “Y”), the number of reserved common maps is acquired and it is determined whether the number of reserved general maps is less than the upper limit (A7002). .

  The game control apparatus 100, when the number of reserved drawings is less than the upper limit (the result of A7002 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved drawings +1 (A7003) and corresponds to the updated number of reserved drawings The address of the random number storage area to be calculated is calculated (A7004). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7005), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7001 is “N”), or the game control apparatus 100 determines that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A7002 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process (A6902) in the above-described general game process will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure of a general power prize winning switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal figure change display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. (A7101). If it is normal (the result of A7101 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (A7102). When there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7102 is “Y”), the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (A7103).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated count of the general-purpose counter has reached an upper limit (for example, 9) (A7104). When the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7104 is “Y”), a pointer (a hit end value) is loaded from the normal control pointer upper limit value area during normal drawing (A7105).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the loaded pointer in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (A7106). Finally, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared (A7107), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize that exceeds the upper limit during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the normal control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is halfway. End with.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control apparatus 100 is not hitting the normal map (the result of A7101 is “N”), when it is determined that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7102 is “N”). ), Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (the result of A7104 is “N”), the power-on winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A6909) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a routine for ordinary processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A7201). If the number of pending drawings is 0 (the result of A7201 is “Y”), the usual drawing transition processing 1 is executed (A7222), and the usual drawing usual processing is terminated. The details of the normal daily process transition setting process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the number of pending reservations is not 0 (the result of A7201 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads a winning random number from the random number storage area (for holding number 1) of the RWM (A7202). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map change display game is a high probability of normal map that is higher than normal, that is, whether or not the time is short (A7203).

  When the game control apparatus 100 is not at the time of the normal high probability (the result of A7203 is “N”), whether or not the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of the normal low probability. Is determined (A7204).

  When the value of the hit random number does not match the low probability determination value (the result of A7204 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (A7205). Further, the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol (A7206), and the random number storage area for each universal symbol (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A7211).

  On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (the result of A7204 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7209). Further, a stop symbol number is set for the normal symbol stop symbol (A7210), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per universal symbol is cleared to 0 (A7219).

  In addition, when the game control device 100 is at a high probability of usual figure (the result of A7203 is “Y”), the value of the hit random number is a lower limit value among a plurality of consecutive determination values used at the high probability of usual figure. It is determined whether it is less than a certain high probability lower limit determination value (A7207).

  In addition, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit determination value (the result of A7207 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 has a plurality of consecutive determination values used when the value of the hit random number is normally high. It is determined whether it is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value which is the upper limit value in (A7208).

  When the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (result of A7208 is “N”), that is, in the case of hit, the game control apparatus 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7209). ). Further, a stop symbol number is set for the normal symbol stop symbol (A7210), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per universal symbol is cleared to 0 (A7211).

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value (result of A7207 is “Y”), or the value of the hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7208 is “Y”), that is, in the case of a loss, the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (A7205). Then, a shift stop symbol number is set for the normal symbol stop symbol (A7206), and the random number storage area for each universal symbol (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero (A7211). That is, the determination value that determines that the hit of the normal figure is the same when the values of the hit random numbers coincide with each other is a single value when the normal figure has a low probability, and a plurality of continuous values when the normal figure has a high probability.

  When the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol, the game control device 100 clears the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per universal symbol to 0 (A7211), and the stop symbol number is set to the test signal output data region. Save (A7212). Then, a decorative common pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (A7213), and a command setting process is executed (A7214). As a result, it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the display device 41 or the like.

  After that, the game control device 100 shifts the random number storage area per ordinary figure (A7215), clears the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7216), and updates the number of ordinary figure pending by -1 (A7217).

  That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during normal power support (during a short time state) (A7218). If the power transmission support is not in progress (the result of A7218 is “N”), a fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) when there is no power transmission support is set (A7219). If the power transmission support is in progress (the result of A7218 is “Y”), a normal map change time (for example, 1 second) during the power transmission support is set (A7220). Then, after the normal time change time is set, the normal time change process transition setting process is executed (A7221), and the normal time normal process ends. Note that the process for setting transition during normal map transition will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the normal routine transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The normal map normal process transition setting process 1 is executed in step A7222 in the normal map normal process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the normal process (A7301), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A7302). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7303), and the normal-day normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a process for setting a transition to a normal change process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The normal change process transition setting process is executed in step A7221 in the normal figure normal process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the process number for shifting to the process for changing the usual figure (A7401), and saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A7402).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start of the general-purpose variable display game in the test signal output data area (A7403), and changes the normal-change flag indicating that the general-purpose variable display game is variable. Save in the control flag area (A7404). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general display indicator, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (A7405), and then the processing for setting the transition to the normal map change process is performed finish.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (A6910) in the above-mentioned general game process will be described. FIG. 73A is a flow chart illustrating a procedure for processing during normal map change according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the normal chart changing process, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general chart display process transition setting process (A7501).

  FIG. 73B is a flow chart illustrating a procedure for a general-purpose display mid-process transition setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying a normal figure (A7511), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A7512).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a normal map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is a display time of the result of the normal map variable display game on the general map display (A7513), and sets the normal map display time. Save to the normal game processing timer area (A7514).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the usual change in the test signal output data area (A7515). Then, a stop flag indicating that the normal map change display game is stopped is saved in the normal map change control flag area (A7516), and the normal map display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the processing for displaying a normal map (A6911) in the above-mentioned normal game processing will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of processing for displaying a normal map according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 loads a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal processing (A7601), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A7602). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set for the loaded hit flag (A7603).

  When the hit information is not set for the hit flag (the result of A7603 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (FIG. 71) for shifting to the normal figure normal process. Is executed (A7612), and the processing for displaying the normal map is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A7603 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the power transmission support is being performed (during the time reduction state) (A7604). ).

  If the game control device 100 is not supporting ordinary power (the result of A7604 is “N”), the game open time (for example, 100 ms) when there is no ordinary power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area. (A7605). In addition, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no ordinary power support is saved in the control pointer area during the usual figure (A7606), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no ordinary power support is usually shown. Save in the upper limit control pointer area (A7607).

  With the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal operation state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a normal process transition setting process (A7611), and ends the general chart display process. The details of the normal process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is supporting the ordinary power (the result of A7604 is “Y”), the game open time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of the ordinary power support is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area. (A7608). Furthermore, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal call (A7609), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is being set to the normal map. Save in the control pointer upper limit area (A7610).

  With the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a normal process transition setting process (A7611), and ends the general chart display process.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing a procedure for a normal process transition setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The process for setting the transition to the normal figure process is executed in step A7611 in the process for displaying the normal figure shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the process number for shifting to the normal process per game (A7701), and saves the process number in the game process number area (A7702). Thereafter, a signal related to the win in the normal map display game and a signal related to the start of the operation of the normal power are saved in the test signal output data area (A7703). Further, the ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the normal power solenoid (A7704).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the ordinary power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 (A7705), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period is obtained. The stored information on the number of illegal power prize winnings stored is cleared (A7706). Lastly, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7707), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting a normal figure (A6912) in the above-mentioned normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing a procedure for a normal hit processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal map (A7801), and the value of the loaded control pointer during the normal map indicates the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the end of the hit). It is determined whether or not the value has reached (A7802).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the upper limit value area of the control pointer during the normal map (the result of A7802 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the control during the normal map. The pointer is updated by +1 (A7803). Furthermore, a normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A7804), and the normal process is terminated. Details of the ordinary power operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the normal drawing reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal drawing (the value of the hit end) (the result of A7802 is “Y”), Without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area in step A7803, the normal operation transition setting process is executed (A7804), and the normal process is completed.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A7804) in the above-described normal hitting process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a normal power operation transition setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A7901). If the value of the control pointer is 0, 3, 5, or 7, the process proceeds to step A7902 to control the block of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning corresponding to the control pointer is performed. The waiting time after the device 37 is closed (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) is saved in the usual game processing timer area (A7902).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c (A7903), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is any one of 1, 4, 6, and 8, the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A7904 and controls the release of the normal variation winning device 37. The normal power release time (for example, any one of 100 ms, 5200 ms, and 1352 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A7904). Further, ON data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn ON the general power solenoid 37c (A7905), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  Further, if the value of the control pointer is either 2 or 9, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A7906 to end the release control of the normal variation winning device 37 and to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing ( In order to execute (A6913), “4” is set as the process number (A7906), and the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A7907).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the ordinary power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) in the ordinary game processing timer area (A7908). Thereafter, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in order to set the general-purpose solenoid 37c to off (A7909), and the general-purpose operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (A6913) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 78A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, the game control device 100 executes a universal game end process transition setting process (A8001).

  FIG. 78B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a universal hitting process transition setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process number “5” related to the end process for the normal game (A8011), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8012). Thereafter, the normal time ending time is saved in the normal time game processing timer area (A8013).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 in the test signal output data area (A8014). Subsequently, the normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (A8015), and the normal control pointer area is cleared per normal figure (A8016). Thereafter, the control pointer upper limit value area during normal maps is cleared (A8017), and the normal chart end process transition setting process is terminated.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (A6914) in the above-described general game process will be described. FIG. 79A is a flow chart showing a procedure for end-of-normal-use processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the usual figure end process, the game control device 100 executes the usual figure normal process transition setting process 2 (A8101).

  FIG. 79B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the normal routine process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “0” related to the usual game routine process (A8111), and further saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A8112). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of hitting of the usual game is saved in the test signal output data area (A8113).

  In addition, the game control device 100 saves a flag (the fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8114), and then shifts to the normal processing routine. The setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a general figure reservation number table in which the display mode on the general figure hold indicator is defined (A8201), acquires display data corresponding to the general figure hold number, and displays the general figure hold display. Is saved in the segment area of the container (A8202). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which a display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined is set (A8203), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired to obtain the special figure 1 hold indicator. (A8204).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 reservation number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined (A8205), acquires display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number, and displays the special data. 2. Save to the segment area of the hold indicator (A8206). Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (A8207), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (A8208). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a game state display table in which display modes on the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined (A8209). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display part (A8210).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery (A8211). If the high probability notification flag is on (the result of A8211 is “Y”), that is, if the high probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the high probability notification flag is not on (the result of A8211 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the off data of the high probability notification LED in the segment area of the third gaming state display unit 59 ( A8212), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of magnet fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  In the gaming control device 100, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A8301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A8301 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control apparatus 100 sets a magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. It is updated (A8302), and it is determined whether or not the timer has expired (A8303).

  The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (result of A8303 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A8304), the magnet fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A8305).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command (A8306), and prepares a magnet fraud occurrence flag as a magnet fraud flag (A8307). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A8313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (the result of A8301 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected. (A8308). If the magnet fraud notification timer defining the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A8309). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A8310). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of A8303 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A8309.

  When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A8310 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A8310 is “Y”), that is, the time has expired or has already expired, Is completed, or when there is no fraud notification from the beginning, a command for magnet fraud notification termination is prepared (A8311).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (A8312), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A8313).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A8313 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, when the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (result of A8313 is “N”), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (A8314), and the command setting process Is executed (A8315). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of radio wave fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A8401). When the radio wave sensor is on (result of A8401 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (A8402).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a radio wave fraud notification command (A8403) and prepares a radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a radio wave fraud flag (A8404). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (A8409). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A8401 is “N”), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 determines the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time. If it is not 0, -1 is updated (A8405). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A8406). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A8406 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (the result of A8406 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, If the notification is terminated or if unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating the unauthorized broadcast notification is prepared (A8407). Furthermore, a radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (A8408), and it is determined whether or not the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag region (A8409).

  When the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (the result of A8409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the radio fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A8409 is “N”), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (A8410), and command setting processing is executed (A8411). Thereafter, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the external information editing process, information collection is performed based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (A1304), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1307), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1311), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1312). Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as a terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A8501). Details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the start port winning signal (A8502). Details of the start port signal editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0 (A8503). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A8504). When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A8504 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is output as external information output data. Save in the area (A8505).

  In addition, when the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (the result of A8504 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 sends the on-data of the symbol determination count signal to the external information. Save in the output data area (A8506).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state. Specifically, the game control device 100 first has a security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like. If not, -1 is updated (A8507). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (A8508). If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A8508 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A8518). Finally, the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A8519), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  In addition, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A8508 is “Y”), that is, the game control device 100 has various errors or frauds, It is determined whether or not it has occurred (A8509 to A8515).

  Specifically, the game control device 100 is generating a glass frame opening error (A8509), a front frame opening error (A8510), a lower major prize opening fraud (A8511), an upper major winning prize fraud (A8512), and a normal power fraud. It is determined whether (A8513), magnet fraud (A8514), and radio wave fraud (A8515) are occurring.

  The gaming control device 100 is generating a glass frame opening error (the result of A8509 is “Y”), a front frame opening error is occurring (the result of A8510 is “Y”), and an illegal lower prize winning opening is occurring (A8511 The result is “Y”), the upper prize winning fraud is occurring (the result of A8512 is “Y”), the electric power fraud is occurring (the result of A8513 is “Y”), the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A8514 is “Y”) ”) Or when radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A8515 is“ Y ”), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A8518). Further, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A8519), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A8508 is “Y”), and the game control device 100 does not generate any error or fraud (from A8509) When the result of A8515 is “N”), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A8516). Thereafter, off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A8517), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A8501) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of main prize ball signal editing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (A8601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A8602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8602 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0. (A8603).

  When the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A8603 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by −1 (A8604), and outputs the main prize ball signal output. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the control timer area (A8605). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 192 ms).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8607), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. If the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (the result of A8603 is “Y”), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A8608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A8606). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (the result of A8606 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of the RWM. Save in the data area (A8607). Further, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A8606 is “N”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A8608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (A8502) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of start port signal editing processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  First, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the start signal output control timer is not 0 (A8701). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (A8702).

  When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8702 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the start port signal output count is 0 (A8703). If the start port signal output count is not 0 (the result of A8703 is “N”), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (A8704), and the start port signal output control is performed in the start port signal output control timer area. The timer initial value is saved (A8705).

  The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time (for example, 64 ms) obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the on state (for example, high level) and the off state (for example, low level) of the start port signal. 192 ms).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the start port signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8707), and ends the start port signal editing process.

  In addition, when the start port signal output count is 0 (the result of A8703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the external information output of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A8708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8702 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period. (A8706). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (the result of A8706 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 uses the RWM external information output data area as the ON data for turning on the start port signal. (A8707) and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (the result of A8706 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the RWM. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A8708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

(Modification of game control)
The control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 of the gaming machine 10 has been described above. The process executed by the game control apparatus 100 is not limited to the above-described procedure, and there are various modifications. Hereinafter, some modified examples will be described.

[Variation 1 of the first embodiment]
In the game control according to the first embodiment of the present invention described above, the processing in the case where an error occurs in the random number generation circuit that generates the big hit random number has not been particularly specified. On the other hand, in the first modification, when a predetermined error occurs when the random number is extracted by the random number generation circuit, the corresponding random number is controlled to be forcibly set to a disadvantageous value for the player.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing in the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. In the present modification, the random number circuit monitoring process is executed between step A1304 and step A1305 of the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 9 (A1330). This is different from the first embodiment. The random number circuit monitoring process is a process for monitoring an error occurrence state of the random number generation circuit. Other processes are the same as those of the timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

[Random circuit monitoring]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number circuit monitoring process in the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The random number circuit monitoring process is executed before the random number update process (A1305, A1306) of the timer interrupt process (A1330).

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is a big hit random number circuit error flag (A9001). As described later, the big hit random number circuit error flag is set when an error occurs in the random number generation circuit, and is erased when the error is resolved. When there is no big hit random number circuit error flag (the result of A9001 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the random number circuit monitoring process because the random number may be updated as usual.

  On the other hand, when there is a big hit random circuit error flag (the result of A9001 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 reads the random number error status register (A9002). The random number error status register stores error information regarding the generated random number.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a big hit random circuit error has occurred from the value of the random number error status register (A9003). When the big hit random number circuit error has not occurred (the result of A9003 is “N”), the big hit random number circuit error counter is cleared to 0 (A9004), and the random number circuit monitoring process is terminated.

  When a big hit random number circuit error has occurred (result of A9003 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the big hit random number circuit error counter by +1 (A9005). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number circuit error counter is 1 (A9006).

  When the jackpot random number circuit error counter is 1 (the result of A9006 is “Y”), the game control device 100 resets the jackpot random number circuit (A9010) and waits until restart of the jackpot random number circuit starts ( A9011). Thereafter, the jackpot random number circuit is restarted (A9012), and the random number circuit monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big hit random number circuit error counter is not 1 (the result of A9006 is “N”), the game control device 100 is in a state where the restart is not completed after the big hit random number circuit error occurs. The big hit random number circuit error flag is set (A9007). Further, a jackpot random number circuit error notification command is prepared (A9008), and command setting processing is executed (A9009). Thereafter, the random number circuit monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, when receiving the big hit random number circuit error notification command, the production control device 300 notifies the occurrence of the big hit random number circuit error through the display device 41, a decoration device such as an LED, the speaker 19, and the like.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
In this modification, when the big hit random number circuit error flag indicating that a big hit random circuit error has occurred by the random number circuit monitoring processing is set, the big hit random number is replaced with the value at the time of disconnection in the special figure start port switch common processing. .

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process in the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The special figure start port switch common process of this modification is a big hit random number when the big hit random number circuit error flag is set in the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment of the present invention. A process for replacing the value with the value at the time of losing is added. This will be specifically described below.

  When the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the big hit random number in the process of step A2804, it determines whether there is a big hit random number circuit error flag (A2830). When there is a big hit random number circuit error flag (the result of A2830 is “Y”), the loaded big hit random number is replaced with the value at the time of disconnection (A2831). The subsequent processing is the same as the special figure start port switch common processing shown in FIG.

  As described above, when an error of the random number generation circuit occurs when extracting the jackpot random number, by intentionally controlling the corresponding random number to be set to a disadvantageous value for the player, It is possible to prevent an act of causing an error to illegally obtain a game value.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment]
In the game control according to the first embodiment of the present invention described above, the variation control timer is updated in the special figure game process. However, in this modification, the variation control timer is updated during the variation of the special figure variation display game. The case where it does is demonstrated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process in the second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. In this modified example, the process related to the variation control timer and the symbol variation control process is deleted from the special figure game process of the first embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. The processing not deleted is the same as the special figure game processing shown in FIG.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process in this modification will be described. FIG. 89B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure changing process in the second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. In the special figure changing process in this modification, a process related to the symbol fluctuation control process deleted from the special figure game process of this modification shown in FIG. 89A is added. In this modification, stop extension information is not set.

  First, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (A4851). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A4852). When the special figure game process timer is 0 (the result of A4852 is “Y”), the special figure display process transition setting process is executed (A4806), and the special figure change process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A4852 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the fluctuation symbol determination flag is the special figure 1 fluctuation flag, that is, is executed. It is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display game is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A4853).

  When the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A4853 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the flashing control timer according to the first special figure by −1. (A4854), the value of the timer is 0, that is, it is determined whether or not the time is up (A4855). If the time is not up (the result of A4855 is “N”), the special figure changing process is terminated.

  When the flashing control timer according to the first special figure expires (the result of A4855 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value of the flashing control timer in the flashing control timer area of the first special figure. (A4856). Further, the variable symbol number related to the first special figure is updated (A4857), and the special figure changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the case where the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A4853 is “N”), that is, the game control device 100 is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The flashing control timer according to the 2 special figure is updated by -1 (A4858). Then, it is determined whether or not the timer value is 0, that is, the time is up (A4859). If the time is not up (the result of A4859 is “N”), the special figure changing process is terminated.

  When the flashing control timer according to the second special figure has expired (the result of A4859 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value of the flashing control timer in the flashing control timer area of the second special figure. (A4860). Further, the variable symbol number related to the second special figure is updated (A4861), and the special figure changing process is terminated.

[Segment LED editing processing]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of segment LED editing processing in the second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. First, the same processing as Step A8201 to Step A8212 of the segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 80 is executed, and then Step A8213 to Step A8223 added in this modification example. The process is executed.

  When the setting regarding the high probability notification flag is completed (A8211, A8212), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the symbol of the first special figure is changing (A8213). When the symbol of the first special figure is fluctuating (the result of A8213 is “Y”), the special symbol 1 symbol display table for fluctuation is set (A8214), and the variable symbol number area of the first special symbol is set. Display data corresponding to the value is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first special figure (A8215). Thereafter, the processing after step A 8218 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the symbol of the first special symbol is not changing (the result of A8213 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets a special symbol 1 symbol display table for stopping (A8216), Display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area in the figure is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first special figure (A8217). Thereafter, the processing after step A 8218 is executed.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the symbol of the second special figure is changing (A8218). When the symbol of the second special symbol is fluctuating (the result of A8218 is “Y”), the special symbol 2 symbol display table for variation is set (A8219), and the variable symbol number area of the second special symbol is set. Display data corresponding to the value is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second special figure (A8220). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the symbol of the second special symbol is not changing (the result of A8218 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 2 symbol display table for stopping (A8221), and the second special symbol is displayed. Display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area in the figure is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second special figure (A8222). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Main processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of main processing on the sub side according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311. The main control microcomputer 311 mainly executes this process and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

  The effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B1001), and permits interruption after executing initial settings of the CPU and VDP (B1002, B1003, B1004).

  Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data (B1005) and sets a random number seed (B1006). Next, the initial value after power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

  Following the processing at the start of the program from B1001 to B1007, the effect control device 300 executes the loop processing from B1008 to B1021.

  In the loop processing, first, WDT (WatchDogTimer) is cleared (B1008), and an effect button input process for generating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is executed (B1009). In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25, a process of changing the effect content is executed.

  Next, the production control device 300 performs hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting of a changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player. Execute (B1010).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the variation display game (B1011), analyzes the command received from the game control device 100, etc. The received command check process is executed (B1012). Details of the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a scenario setting process, a motion control process, and an effect display editing process (B1013, B1014, B1015), and sets a drawing command preparation end (B1016). In the effect display editing process, the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer by updating various data in accordance with the contents to be drawn. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current time is the frame switching timing (B1017). The production control device 300 waits until the frame switching timing comes (the result of B1017 is “N”), and when the frame switching timing comes (the result of B1017 is “Y”), instructs the VDP to draw the screen (B1018). ). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching).

  Next, the effect control device 300 is a sound control process for controlling output to the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18, and a panel effect device. The movable body control process for controlling the motor 44 and the solenoid 44 is executed (B1019, B1020, B1021), and the process returns to clearing the WDT (B1008).

[Received command check processing]
Next, the received command check process (B1012) in the above-mentioned sub-side main process will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of received command check processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process for confirming the presence / absence of a received command and analyzing the received command.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during the frame (1/30 second) as the command reception number (B3001), and the command reception number is 0. It is determined whether or not (B3002).

  When the number of received commands is 0 (the result of B3002 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this process. If the command reception number is not 0, that is, if there is a counter value (the result of B3002 is “Y”), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the command reception number (B3003).

  Next, the effect control device 300 copies the contents of the received command buffer to the command area (B3004), and updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (B3005).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not command copying for the number of received commands has been completed (B3006). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  When the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (result of B3006 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the processes of B3004 and B3005.

  When copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (result of B3006 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the contents of the command area (B3007) and receives the received command for analyzing the received command. Command analysis processing is executed (B3008). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates the address of the command area (B3009), and determines whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (B3010). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B3010 is “N”), the processing from B3007 to B3009 is executed until the analysis for the number of receptions is completed. When the analysis is completed (the result of B3010 is “Y”), this process is terminated.

  Thus, in this process, the commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (B3008) in the received command check process described above will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of received command analysis processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process for analyzing the received command.

  The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the command as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (B3101), and determines whether or not the MODE is in the normal range (B3102).

  When MODE is in the normal range (result of B3102 is “Y”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not ACT is in the normal range (B3103). When ACT is also in the normal range, (The result of B3103 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (B3104).

  If MODE is not in the normal range (result of B3102 is “N”), ACT is not in the normal range (result of B3103 is “N”), or if ACT for MODE is not correct (result of B3104) Is “N”), the production control device 300 cannot analyze the command, and thus ends this processing without executing the subsequent processing.

  When the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (the result of B3104 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the MODE is within the range of the variable command (B3105). The variation command includes a variation pattern command and a stop symbol command.

  When MODE is within the range of the variable command (the result of B3105 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the variable command processing (B3106), and ends this processing. Details of the variable command processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the MODE is not within the range of the variable command (the result of B3105 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the MODE is within the range of the big hit command (B3107). The jackpot command includes a fanfare command, an interval command, and an ending command.

  If MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (the result of B3107 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the jackpot command processing (B3108) and ends this processing.

  When MODE is not within the range of the jackpot command (the result of B3107 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether MODE is within the range of the symbol command (B3109).

  When MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (the result of B3109 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the symbol-related command processing (B3110), and this processing is terminated.

  When MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (result of B3109 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (B3111). Single-shot commands include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, power failure recovery commands, power-on commands, probability information commands, error commands, and RTC commands.

  When the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (the result of B3111 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes the single-shot command processing (B3112) and ends this processing.

  When the MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (the result of B3111 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the MODE is within the range of the prefetch command (B3113). The prefetch command includes a prefetch variation pattern command and a prefetch stop symbol command.

  When MODE is within the range of the prefetch command (the result of B3113 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes the prefetch command processing (B3114) and ends this processing. Details of the prefetch command processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when MODE is not within the range of the prefetch command (result of B3113 is “N”), the production control device 300 ends this process without executing any command process.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the variable command process (B3106) in the received command analysis process described above will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the variable command processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process of confirming whether or not the received variable command has been normally received.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed from the received variable command (B3201). This determination makes it possible to check whether a stop symbol command has been received before receiving the variation pattern command. Since the stop symbol command includes information on the type of the special symbol fluctuation display game (whether it is special graph 1 or special graph 2), if the stop symbol command can be received normally, the special symbol variation display game It is determined that the type of is not yet determined. When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B3201 is “Y”), the stop control command has not been received normally, and thus the rendering control apparatus 300 ends this process.

  When the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B3201 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (B3202). In the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the type of stop symbol command matches (matches) the variation pattern command. Thus, for example, when the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command type do not match, such as a combination of a variation pattern command of hit variation and a stop symbol command of the off symbol, it does not vary (specifically (Do not play the decoration special figure fluctuation display game).

  As a result of the determination in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (B3202), when the variation pattern command and the type of the stop symbol command do not match (result of B3203 is “Y”), the production control device 300 performs this processing. finish.

When the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command type match (result of B3203 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes a variation effect setting process described below (B3204), and this process is performed. finish.

[Variation production setting processing]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the changing effect setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process of setting a stop symbol or the like based on the received variable command, and is executed in the above-described variable command process.

  The effect control device 300 first executes a variation pattern classification process for classifying which variation pattern corresponds to the variation pattern command received (B3301), and clears all the notice information areas (B3302).

  Next, the production control apparatus 300 executes the first-half variation notice lottery process (B3303), and whether or not the variation pattern based on the classification in the variation pattern classification process (B3301) is roughly divided into variation patterns of reachless variation. (B3304). The details of the first half change notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect control device 300 executes the second-half variation notice lottery process only when the variation pattern of the variation without reach is not roughly divided (the result of B3304 is “N”) (B3305).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration stop symbol setting process and a variation start setting process (B3306, B3307), and ends this process.

[Change notice lottery process]
Next, the first half variation setting process (B3303) in the variation effect setting process described above will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first-half fluctuation notice lottery process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter-half fluctuation notice lottery process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 300 first sets the first half notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern and the effect mode (B3401), and performs a notice group lottery process for selecting a notice group for the notice effect at the start of change. (B3402) is executed. For example, “No notice”, “PB (push button) notice”, “Change start notice”, “Background change notice”, “PB notice + Change start notice”, “PB notice + Background change notice”, and “Change start notice” A notice group is selected from “+ background change notice”.

  Next, as a result of the lottery processing in the notice group lottery process (B3402), when “no notice” is not selected, that is, when there is a notice (result of B3403 is “N”), the production control device 300 performs the notice. A detailed lottery process is executed (B3404). The detailed notice lottery process is a process for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to appear at the start of the change from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery of B3402.

  Up to this point, for example, when “background change notice” is selected in the lottery in step B3402, a notice pattern to appear from among a plurality of types of background change notices is selected, and information on the selected notice pattern varies. It is stored as normal effect information of the start notice effect.

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the first half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of the variation pattern and the production mode (B3405), and performs a notice group lottery process for performing a lottery for selecting the notice group for the pre-reach notice effect. (B3406) is executed. For example, the notice group is selected from “step-up notice”, “conversation notice”, and “no notice”.

  Next, as a result of the lottery processing in the notice group lottery process (B3406), when “no notice” is not selected, that is, when there is a notice (result of B3407 is “N”), the production control device 300 provides the notice. The detailed lottery process is executed (B3408), and this process ends.

  When “no notice” is selected (the result of B3407 is “Y”), the production control device 300 stores information on “no notice” as the normal production information of the pre-reach notice effect, and ends this processing. To do.

  In addition, since the second half change notice lottery process is the same process as this process, the description is omitted.

[Prefetch command processing]
Next, the prefetch command processing (B3114) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch command processing procedure according to the first embodiment of this invention. In this process, when the prefetch variation pattern command and the prefetch stop symbol command are set in the upper byte (MODE) of the command received by the effect control device 300, the setting of the hold icon 83 of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. And is executed in the received command analysis process described above.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (B3601). When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B3601 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 ends this process.

  When the special figure type is determined (the result of B3601 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (B3602).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetched variation pattern command received and the symbol type match based on the determination in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (B3602) (B3603). If the look-ahead variation pattern command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B3603 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this process.

  If the look-ahead variation pattern command matches the symbol type (the result of B3603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current gaming state is non-electric support (B3604).

  When the current gaming state is non-electric support (the result of B3604 is “Y”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure 1 (B3605). When the figure type is not special figure 1 (result of B3605 is “N”), the production control apparatus 300 ends this process.

  When the special figure type is special figure 1 (the result of B3605 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 is a process of setting whether the display mode of the hold display is the normal mode or the notification mode. The special figure 1 hold notice setting process is executed (B3606). Details of the special figure 1 hold notice setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 is a process of setting a selection of a mode display effect in which a continuous display effect that performs a related special effect across a plurality of variations and a special background display that occurs in a plurality of variations. A special figure 1 continuous notice setting process is executed (B3607), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the electric support (the result of B3604 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2 (B3608). When the special figure type is not special figure 2 (the result of B3608 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this process.

  When the special figure type is special figure 2 (result of B3608 is “Y”), the production control device 300 is a process of setting whether the display mode of the hold display is the normal mode or the notification mode. The special figure 2 hold advance notice setting process is executed (B3609).

  Next, the effect control device 300 is a process of setting a selection of a mode display effect in which a continuous display effect that performs a related special effect across a plurality of variations and a special background display that occurs in a plurality of variations. A special figure 1 continuous notice setting process is executed (B3610), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, since the special figure 2 is preferentially digested, the non-electric support (normal gaming state, during the latent period) is prefetched with respect to the start memory (holding memory) of the special figure 1. Only production (holding production, continuous notice) is set, and only pre-reading production for special figure 2 is set during the electric support. In the case where the reserved memory of FIG. 1 and the reserved memory of FIG. 2 are digested in the order of winning, pre-reading effects for both of the reserved memories may be executed. Further, pre-reading is executed by making a prior determination by the prior determination means prior to the execution of the variable display game of the hold memory.

[Hold icon]
FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating the normal system hold icon according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating the special system hold icon according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The hold icon 83 is a display of hold storage (start-up storage) displayed on the display device 41. For example, the hold icon 83 is displayed in a circle, and a color or character corresponding to the reliability is displayed by prefetching (preliminary determination). In the first embodiment of the present invention, the hold icon 83 includes a normal hold icon for notifying the reliability shown in FIG. 99 and a special hold icon for notifying the development destination and hit as shown in FIG. Can be broadly classified.

In addition to “white”, which is the normal hold display, “blue”, “red”, “rainbow”
A hold icon 83 that changes to is prepared. The reliability increases in the order of “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”.

  As the special system hold icon, a hold icon 83 displayed as “SP” or “SP3” for notifying the development destination is prepared. Note that “SP” notifies the development (occurrence) of special 1 reach to special 3 reach, and “SP3” notifies the development (occurrence) of special 3 reach. In addition, a hold icon 83 that displays “Collision” and “Correct” for notifying the hit as it is is prepared. “Crash” gives a notice that a sudden probability change big hit (2R probability change big hit) will occur, and “Choice” will give a notice that a big hit will occur.

[Game board]
FIG. 101 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In the game board 30 of the first embodiment, warp inlets 42 a are provided on both the left and right sides of the center case (game production component) 40. In addition, a normal start gate 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the left side, and three general winning holes 35 are disposed below it. In the present embodiment, left-handed is an advantageous way to hit the player.

  Inside the center case 40, a movable effect member (board effect device) 44, a pair of decorative members 46, a display device 41, and a pair of game balls flowing down the game area 32 are received from the top and guided to the inside of the center case 40. The warp device 42 and the stage 43 are arranged. Also, a special figure 1 fluctuation display LED 66, a special figure 2 fluctuation display LED 67, and a general map fluctuation display LED 68 are arranged in order from the top under the right warp inlet 42 a and at the edge of the center case 40. The stage 43 extends in the left-right direction at the bottom of the center case 40 and is formed as a corrugated shape having a height at the center. In the central part of the stage 43, just above the special figure 1 start winning opening 36, a game ball rolling on the stage 43 is received from the introduction opening which is the upstream end and just above the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36. A guide port 43a serving as a lead-out end of the guide channel for guiding the game ball is formed.

  The movable effect member 44 is formed, for example, imitating an insect face, and is movable from the initial position shown in FIG. 101 to the front of the display device 41, that is, downward from the initial position. An LED (not shown in the figure) is provided inside, a light emission effect is possible, and the movable part (touch angle) 44a can also be operated up and down.

  The decoration device 46 includes, for example, an LED (not shown), is configured to perform a light emission effect at a predetermined timing, and to be able to vibrate and move.

  Further, a holding display unit case 500 is disposed in a portion indicated by a dotted line. The hold display unit case 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Below the center case 40 and below the game area 32, a special figure 1 start winning opening 36 and a special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d are arranged. The special figure 2 start winning opening 37d is configured to be able to win only when the pair of movable pieces (opening / closing member, movable member) 37b is opened, and the pair of movable pieces 37b It is opened for a predetermined period when wins.

  Under the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d, an attacker-type variable winning device 38 is arranged. In the variable winning device 38, the open / close door 38c is opened over a predetermined number of rounds for a certain period during the special gaming state, and award balls are paid out to the player according to the number of winning balls.

[Pending display unit]
FIG. 102 is a perspective view of the hold display unit case 500, (A) is a view with the hold display unit 510 in the initial position, (B) is a view with the hold display unit 510 in the effect position, and (C) is the first view. It is the figure which 4 hold display part 511d opened.

  The hold display unit case 500 is configured by a base member 501 having an accommodation space therein, and accommodates the hold display unit 510 in the accommodation space. When the hold display unit 510 is in the standby state, as shown in FIG. 102A, the hold display unit 510 is placed in the storage space of the hold display unit case 500 that is the initial position (standby position, first position). stand by.

  The base member 501 has a front surface constituted by a shielding wall portion 502 including a translucent lens portion 503. The translucent lens part 503 can emit light (translucent) by the light of each holding display part 511 (holding display LED 513).

  As shown in FIG. 102B, the hold display unit 510 includes, for example, four hold display portions (mechanical hold storage) 511 that imitate four petals (movable members) 512 that can be mechanically opened and closed. Established. The hold display unit 511 is a first hold display unit 511a, a second hold display unit 511b, a third hold display unit 511c, and a fourth hold display unit 511d in order from the left, and a display device is provided at the center of the petal 512. A hold display LED (hold light) 513 having a luminance higher than 41 is provided. Note that the hold display unit 510 is attached to a back surface structure (not shown) disposed on the back surface side of the game board.

  The hold display unit case 500 is disposed, for example, so as to face the lower side of the display device 41 in a range indicated by a dotted line in FIG. The screen area displayed on the display device 41 includes a fluctuation display area 79 in which special symbols (identification information) fluctuate, and a standby hold display area 80 in which start memory is displayed as a hold icon 83. On the left side, a digest hold display area 88 for displaying the start memory during the execution of the variable display game is provided, and on the right side of the standby hold display area 80, a mode display section 87 indicating a game mode is provided. In the standby hold display area 80, as shown in FIG. 102A, a first hold icon 83a, a second hold icon 83b, a third hold icon 83c, and a fourth hold icon 83d indicated by four dotted lines can be displayed. It is. As described above, the hold icon 83 can be displayed (changed) as a normal hold icon or a special hold icon. Note that the hold icon 83 is not displayed when there is no start memory.

  Since the display device 41 is positioned directly above the hold display unit case 500, when the hold display unit 510 is in the production state, the hold display unit 510 displays as shown in FIG. It protrudes in front of the standby hold display area 80 of the device 41. Then, the hold display unit 510 shields the standby hold display area 80 of the display device 41 from the player in front view, and causes the player to visually recognize the hold display unit 511 provided in the hold display unit 510 instead. The hold display unit 510 rises from the initial position to the effect position (the operation position, the second position) when a predetermined condition is satisfied such that the number of holds is greater than 2 and the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time. It will be in the production state.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (C), the hold display unit 511 indicates that the petal 512 can be expanded (operated), and the petal 512 is expanded, so that the player has high reliability of the start memory. Notification (mechanism hold notice) can be made. In addition, from the viewpoint of suppressing the width in the front-rear direction of the space in which the hold display unit 510 is accommodated, when the hold display unit 510 is in the standby position, the petal 512 may be opened and closed after being raised to the effect position. .

  Moreover, even if it is a case where the hold display unit 510 exists in an initial position without providing the shielding wall part 502, it is good also as visual recognition from the front. Furthermore, a start-up hold display unit 511 that is currently executing the variable display game may be provided at a position corresponding to the digest hold display area 88.

  As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, apart from the hold icon 83 displayed on the display device 41, the operable hold display unit 510 moves (protrudes) to the front of the hold icon 83 to hold it. The hold display unit 511 of the display unit 510 notifies the reliability.

[Special figure 1 hold notice setting process]
Next, the special figure 1 reservation notice setting process (B3606) in the above-described prefetch command process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 hold notice setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIGS. 104A and 104B are diagrams for explaining a pending change notice determination table 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, where FIG. 104A is a pending change notice determination table 1 for winning, and FIG. 104B is a pending change notice notice. It is a figure explaining the decision table.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the hold change timing determination table according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 105 (A) shows the table 1 used when the hold icon 83 changes to blue, and FIG. Table 2 used when the hold icon 83 changes to red, (C) is a diagram illustrating the table 3 used when the hold icon 83 changes rainbow, SP, SP3, suddenly, and certainly.

  The special figure 1 hold notice setting process is a process for setting whether the display mode of the hold display is the normal form or the notice form, and is executed in the above-described prefetch command process. The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current reserved memory number is 2 or more (B3701). Although it is determined whether or not the current number of reserved memories is 2 or more, it may be determined whether or not the number is more than another value.

  When the current number of reserved memories is 2 or more (the result of B3701 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the remaining variation time of the variation display game currently being executed is greater than a predetermined time. Determination is made (B3702).

  When the number of reserved memories is not 2 or more (result of B3701 is “N”), or when the remaining fluctuation time is not longer than the predetermined time (result of B3702 is “N”), the mechanical hold notice is not executed. Therefore, the production control device 300 sets final hold icon display information (normal) and initial hold icon display information (normal), that is, “white without change” in the corresponding hold storage area (B3703).

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the no-hold change notice information and the no-change suggestion notice information in the corresponding hold storage area (B3704, B3705), and ends this process. The change suggestion notice is generally called an effect, and is executed when the hold icon 83 is turned on or blinked, and when it is a mechanical hold notice, the hold display LED 513 is blinked. The effect in the present application is for notifying that the display mode such as the luminescent color changes from the mode being displayed, and is referred to as a change suggesting notice effect or simply an effect.

  When the remaining variation time of the currently displayed variation display game is longer than the predetermined time (the result of B3702 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 indicates that the stop symbol of the currently displayed variation display game is a big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (B3706). Here, the result of the running variable display game is determined based on whether the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol, but may be determined based on whether or not the random number value of the jackpot random number is a jackpot value.

  When the result is a big hit (the result of B3706 is “Y”), the production control device 300 determines the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading production and the notice mode (holding display mode after the final change) when it is executed. Next, the final mode (final hold icon) of the hold icon 83 is determined based on the “hold change notice determination table 1” shown in FIG. 104 (A) (B3707).

  If the result is not a big hit (result of B3706 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines the final hold icon based on the “hold change notice determination table 2” shown in FIG. B3708). The hold change notice determination table 2 has a lower rate of execution of hold changes than the hold change notice determination table 1, and “rainbow”, “crash”, and “probability” are not displayed.

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the final hold icon information determined in the corresponding hold storage area (B3709), and whether or not the final hold icon is a notice mode, that is, whether it is “other than white”. Is determined (B3710).

  When the final hold icon is a notice mode (the result of B3710 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the change pattern of the hold memory to be determined is SP reach (B3711).

  When the variation pattern is SP reach (the result of B3711 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether there is a holding storage in which the mechanism holding notice information is set (whether the mechanism holding notice is being executed). No) is checked and determined (B3712, B3713).

  If there is a hold storage in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set (the result of B3713 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 uses the display device 41 as the display hold advance notice or the hold display unit 510. It is determined by lottery whether to make a mechanical hold notice which is a pre-reading effect by (B3714).

  When the mechanical hold advance notice is executed (the result of B3715 is “Y”), the production control device 300 stores the mechanical hold advance notice information, the initial hold icon display information (normal), and the change suggestion advance notice information in the corresponding hold storage area. Is set (B3716, B3717, B3718), and this process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the mechanical hold advance notice is set to be executed only in the case of SP reach, but the mechanical hold advance notice may be executed in addition to SP reach. In addition, the mechanical hold advance notice is set to be executed only when the hold icon 83 is in the notice form (when the hold icon 83 changes), but the mechanical hold notice is also provided when the hold icon 83 is not in the notice form. May be executed.

  When the fluctuation pattern is not SP reach (result of B3711 is “N”), when there is no hold storage in which the mechanical hold notice information is set (result of B3713 is “N”), or when the mechanical hold notice is not executed (The result of B3715 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets display hold advance notice information in the corresponding hold storage area (B3719).

  Next, the production control device 300 sets a change timing determination table (see FIG. 104) corresponding to the final hold icon information (B3720), and determines the hold change timing (change pattern) based on the hold number (stored number). (B3721).

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the hold change timing information and the initial icon display information determined in the corresponding hold storage area (B3722), and determines whether or not there is a change after the start winning (B3723). Here, the case where there is a change after the start winning is a case where the initial display mode of the hold icon 83 displayed at the time of winning and the final display mode displayed at the time of digestion are different from each other.

  When there is a change after the start winning (the result of B3723 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the change suggestion notice information in the corresponding reserved storage area (B3718), and ends this process.

  When there is no change after the start winning prize (the result of B3723 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines by lottery whether or not to add a change suggestion notice effect in order to insert the gas effect (B3725). ). Here, since the effect is added as a gas, the probability of adding the change suggestion notice effect is set to a low probability.

  When the change suggestion notice effect is added by the lottery at step B3725 (the result of B3726 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 sets the change suggestion notice information in the corresponding reserved storage area (B3718). This process is terminated.

  If no change suggestion notice effect is added due to the lottery at step B3725 (the result of B3726 is “N”), the production control device 300 sets no change suggestion notice information in the corresponding reserved storage area (B3705). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the final hold icon is not a notice mode, that is, if the final hold icon is white (the result of B3710 is “N”), information without hold change notice is set in the corresponding hold storage area (B3724). ), The processing after B3725 is executed.

  It should be noted that the effect type may be changed according to the reliability with which the stored memory changes.

  Further, in the hold change timing determination tables 1 to 3, a so-called rank-down change in which the reliability decreases such that the hold display that has been displayed in red is changed to blue may be set.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Display Processing]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure 1 hold display process according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is a process for executing the display of the hold icon 83 based on the set initial hold icon display information and final hold icon display information.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation display game has been started (B3801). If the variation has not started (result of B3801 is “N”), the processing from B3802 to B3812 is executed. Without executing this, the process of B3813 is executed.

  If the change has started (the result of B3801 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 checks whether there is a hold memory in which the display hold notice information is set, and determines (B3802, B3803). ).

  When there is no hold storage in which the display hold advance notice information is set (the result of B3803 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes the process of B3813 without executing the process of B3804 to B3812.

  When there is a hold storage in which the display hold notice information is set (the result of B3803 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 updates the corresponding hold icon display information based on the change notice notice information (B3804), It is determined whether or not there is a hold icon 83 that changes from the initial display mode of the hold icon 83 (B3805).

  When there is a change hold icon 83 (the result of B3805 is “Y”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the mechanical hold notice is being executed (B3806), and the mechanical hold notice is being executed. If not (the result of B3806 is “N”), the output of the hold change sound is set (B3807). When there are a plurality of hold icons 83 that change, hold change sounds may be output as many as the number of change hold icons 83, or special hold change sounds may be output.

  When there is no change hold icon 83 (the result of B3805 is “N”), the production control device 300 executes the processes after B3808 without setting the hold change sound because no hold change occurs.

  Next, the production control device 300 checks whether or not there is a hold memory that changes to the last hold icon information, and determines (B3808, B3809).

  If there is no pending memory that changes to the final pending icon information (the result of B3809 is “N”), the production control device 300 checks whether there is a pending memory that is executing the gasset change suggestion notice and determines (B3810, B3811).

  When there is a pending storage that changes to the final pending icon information (the result of B3809 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the processing after B3812 without executing the processing from B3810 to B3811.

  When there is a pending storage during execution of the gas change suggestion notice (the result of B3811 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 changes the change suggestion notice information of the relevant reserved memory to information without a change suggestion notice ( B3812).

  Next, the production control device 300 executes a hold display execution process, which is a process of displaying each hold icon 83 and the effect based on the hold memory count, the hold icon display information, and the change suggestion notice information (B3813). Exit.

  On the other hand, when there is no hold storage during execution of the gas change suggestion notice (the result of B3811 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 sets B3813 without setting the change suggestion notice information in the corresponding hold memory. Execute the process.

[Mechanism hold notice execution process]
FIG. 107A is a flowchart illustrating the first half of the mechanical hold advance notice execution process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The first half of the mechanical hold advance notice execution process is a process for setting change timing information and change mode information of the mechanical hold advance notice.

  FIG. 107B is a flowchart illustrating the second half of the mechanical hold advance notice execution process according to the first embodiment of this invention. The latter half of the mechanism hold notice execution process is a process for setting notice suggestion information for the mechanism hold notice. The notice suggestion for the mechanical hold notice is a notice based on whether or not the registration marks 73a (see FIG. 109) and the butterfly 73b (see FIG. 109) jump to the target hold display section (mechanic hold storage) 511. This is the suggestion.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the reserved storage area according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108A is a diagram for explaining the structure of the special figure 1 reserved storage area 360. FIG. FIG. 6C is a diagram for explaining the structure of the special figure 2 reserved storage area 370, and FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining the structures of the digest pending storage area 362 and the standby pending storage areas 1 to 4 (363 to 366) in FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating the notice suggesting character 73 according to the first embodiment of this invention. When the registration marks 73a and the butterfly 73b remain on the upper part of the hold display unit (mechanism hold memory) 511, the mechanism hold memory 511 is flowered.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the mechanical hold notice information is set for the special figure 1 start prize (B3901).

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, since the mechanical hold advance notice is executed only for the hold storage of the special figure 1, when the mechanical hold advance notice is not set in the special figure 1 (B3901). Is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not execute the process in the first half of the mechanical hold advance notice execution process (the process for setting the change timing and change mode information of the mechanical hold advance notice) and the processes after B3915 Execute.

  When the special figure 1 is set with the mechanical hold notice information (the result of B3901 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the reserved storage number of the special figure 1 is a specified number. Is determined (B3902). The determination value here is set to “4”, for example.

  When the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 is not four (the result of B3902 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the processing after B3915 without executing the processing of the first half of this processing.

  If the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4 (the result of B3902 is “Y”), it is checked whether or not there is a hold memory in FIG. B3903, B3904).

  When there is no hold memory of the special figure 1 in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set (the result of B3904 is “N”), it is not necessary to set the change timing and change mode information of the mechanical hold advance notice, so the production control The apparatus 300 executes the processing after B3915 without executing the processing in the first half of this processing.

  In the case where there is a hold memory of FIG. 1 in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set (the result of B3904 is “Y”), the production control device 300 has a digestion order of the hold memory in which the mechanical hold advance notice information is set to 1. It is determined whether it is the second (B3905).

  When the digest order is first (the result of B3905 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 acquires the remaining variation time of the variation display game being executed (B3906), and the remaining variation time is less than the predetermined time. It is determined whether or not the length is longer (B3907).

  When the remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the predetermined time (the result of B3907 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 has no change suggestion notice in the hold storage area (change suggestion notice information area 387) of the target hold memory. Information is set (B3908), and the effect is canceled. The structure of the reserved storage area will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the production control device 300 sets no hold change advance notice information in the hold change advance notice information area 384 of the target hold memory, and also displays white lighting information in the hold display LED lighting information area 388 of the target hold memory. Setting is made (B3909).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a mechanical hold advance notice gossip operation (elevation) for causing the hold display unit 510 to go up and down (B3910).

  When the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time (the result of B3907 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines the hold change timing based on the target hold memory digestion order (B3912).

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the determined hold change timing information in the hold change timing information area 385 of the target hold storage, and sets the white blink information of the hold display LED 513 in the hold display LED lighting information area 388 ( B3913). By setting the white lighting information of the hold display LED 513, the effect of the mechanical hold notice (flashing white) is set.

  Next, the production control device 300 executes the mechanical hold advance notice main operation (rise) in order to cause the hold display unit 510 to perform the main operation instead of the frustration (B3914).

  On the other hand, when the digestion order is not the first (the result of B3905 is “N”), the production control device 300 sets the white lighting information in the hold display LED lighting information area 388 of the hold memory having the first digestion order. (B3911), and the processing from B3912 to B3914 is executed.

  In this way, when there is a prescribed number of reserved memories for the reserved memory of FIG. 1, the effect of the mechanical hold notice and the lighting information of the hold display LED 513 are set, and the ascent operation of the hold display unit 510 is also related. Setting is made. In addition, when the notice effect by the hold icon 83 is performed, you may control not to perform a mechanical hold notice so that the said notice effect may not be inhibited.

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the mechanical hold notice is being executed, that is, whether or not the hold display unit 510 is being lifted (B3915).

  When the mechanical hold advance notice is not being executed (result of B3915 is “N”), the production control device 300 is a process of operating the movable member (petal) 512 of each hold display unit 511 based on the production operation information. A certain hold display unit operation process is executed (B3932), and this process ends.

  When the mechanical hold advance notice is being executed (the result of B3915 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 holds the hold display LED 513 based on the hold storage number and the hold display LED lighting information. The LED lighting process is executed (B3916).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current time is the hold change timing (B3917).

  When the present is the hold change timing (the result of B3917 is “Y”), the production control device 300 is based on the final hold icon information set in the final hold icon information area 383 of the target hold storage. Then, the notice suggestion character 73 (see FIG. 109) is determined (B3918).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes the lighting change main effect with the determined notice suggestion character 73 (B3919). The lighting change main effect includes a suggestion effect by the notice suggestion character 73, a lighting effect change effect of the mechanical hold storage 511, and a flowering effect of the movable member.

  Next, the production control device 300 changes the hold display LED lighting information set in the hold display LED lighting information area 388 of the target hold storage to the lighting information of the color corresponding to the final hold icon information (B3920). .

  Next, the production control device 300 changes the production operation information set in the production operation information area 389 of the target hold storage from the closed flower information to the flowering information (B3921).

  On the other hand, when the current time is not the hold change timing (the result of B3917 is “N”), the effect control device 300 draws the execution of the lighting change gaze effect by the notice suggestion character 73 (B3922).

  Only when the lottery is won (the result of B3922 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the lighting change gaze effect by the notice suggestion character 1 (see FIG. 109) (B3923). The lighting change gaze effect is a gaze effect by the notice suggestion character 73 (dragonfly 73a), and is an effect in which the dragonfly 73a flies and appears as if it stays at the upper part of the target mechanical hold memory 511, and does not stay. is there.

  Next, the production control device 300 checks whether or not the change in the hold memory in which the mechanical hold notice information is set is started, and determines (B3925, B3926).

  If the change has started (the result of B3926 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the mechanical suspension notice is the end timing (B3927).

  When the change has not started (result of B3926 is “N”), or when the mechanical hold advance notice is not the end timing (result of B3927 is “N”), the production control device 300 performs the operation from B3928 to B3931. Without executing the process, the hold display unit operation process is executed (B3932), and this process ends.

  When the mechanical hold advance notice is the end timing (result of B3927 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 changes the hold icon display information area 386 in the digest hold storage area 362 to the final hold icon information (B3929). ).

  Next, the production control device 300 executes a mechanical hold advance notice end operation (down) for lowering the hold display unit 510 (B3930), and turns off the hold display LED 513 in the mechanical hold storage 511 (B3931).

  Next, the production control device 300 executes a hold display unit operation process (B3932), and ends this process.

  In this way, in the latter half of this process, when the hold display unit 510 is raised to the effect position, the selection of the notice suggestion character 73, the presence or absence of execution of the notice suggestion effect, lighting information of the mechanical hold display LED 513, and the like. Is set. Further, when it is the end timing of the mechanical hold notice, the display mode of the hold icon 83, the descent of the hold display unit 510, the turn-off of the hold display LED 513, and the like are set.

  Note that here, the mechanical hold advance notice is controlled to be executed when the number of reserved memories shown in FIG. 1 reaches four. However, depending on other conditions, the display hold advance notice that is a pre-reading effect on the display device 41 is controlled. Any one of the mechanical hold notices may be preferentially executed.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (A), the reserved memory structure is provided with a special figure 1 reserved memory area 360 and a special figure 2 reserved memory area 370. The special figure 1 hold storage area 360 includes a hold number storage area 361 in which a hold number is set, a digest hold storage area 362 in which information of a hold storage being executed is set, and standby hold storage areas 363 to 366 1 to 4 Defined by

  Among these, the digestion hold storage area 362 and the standby hold storage areas 363 to 366 are configured by nine information areas shown in FIG. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern information area 381, a stop symbol information area 382, a final hold icon information area 383, a hold change notice information area 384, a hold change timing information area 385, a hold icon display information area 386, and a change suggestion notice information area 387, a hold display LED lighting information area 388, and an effect operation information area 389.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, information relating to the mechanical reservation storage 511 is not set in the special figure 2, but the structure of the special figure 2 storage area 370 shown in FIG. Since the structure is the same as that of 360, description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109, for example, the notice suggestion character 73 changes in the mechanical hold memory 511, and the mechanism hold memory 511 changes (flowering). There is a notice suggestion character 2 (butterfly) 73b with high expectation. Any character 73 is displayed on the display device 41. For example, while appearing from the side of the screen and jumping to the left and right, the character 73 stays at the top of one or a plurality of mechanical hold memories 511 for a short time or jumps without staying at all. To do.

[Operation and screen transition of hold display unit when this effect is executed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110A to FIG. 110D, the operation and screen display of the hold display unit 510 when the main effect (that is, not the gaze effect) by the mechanical hold memory 511 is executed will be described.

  110A to 110D are diagrams illustrating the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the display at the bottom of the screen when the main effect of the first embodiment of the present invention is executed. Here, the start to end of the mechanical hold notice will be described.

  Prior to the start of the mechanical hold notice, the fourth prize is generated in FIG. 1 and the remaining time of the running variable display game is longer than the predetermined time, so the conditions for executing the mechanical hold notice are satisfied. Further, before the start of the mechanical hold notice, the effected third hold icon 83c is informed that the reliability is high, and in the mechanical hold notice, the reliability of the hold storage of the third hold icon 83c is particularly high. High production is performed.

  110A shows a state in which three special figure 1 reserved memories are displayed. The first hold icon 83a is displayed in blue, the second hold icon 83b is displayed in white, and the third hold icon 83c is displayed in white with an effect applied. The effect of the third hold icon 83c is an effect that suggests a mechanical hold notice. It is. In addition, the mode display unit 87 notifies (notifies) the player that something will happen when the number of holdings reaches four, such as “When four holdings are accumulated ...”. Further, in the digestion pending display area 88, the reliability of the pending storage of the currently running variable display game is displayed in white, and all the special symbols on the left, middle and right are changing. The hold display unit 510 is accommodated in the hold display unit case 500.

  (B) represents a state in which the fourth reserved storage is displayed in FIG. Since the fourth prize was generated during the transition from (A) to (B), the mode display unit 87 displays “Yes, the fourth!” To notify that the number of holds has reached four. At the same time, the winning hold memory is displayed on the fourth hold icon 83d. Further, the mechanical advance notice hold is started, and the hold display unit 510 starts to rise from the standby position.

  (C) represents a state in which the hold display unit 510 is raised to the effect position. When the raising of the hold display unit 510 is completed, the notice display mode is set by the mechanism hold storage 511, so that the “mechanism notice mode” is displayed on the mode display unit 87. Moreover, since the visual recognition of the back hold icon 83 is shielded because the hold display unit 510 is raised, the hold icon 83 cannot be visually recognized by the player while the hold display unit 510 is in the effect position. It is difficult to see. For the sake of convenience, the hold icon 83 displayed behind is displayed small in the lower right part of (C), but such a display is not displayed on the shielding wall 502 in the actual gaming machine 10.

  In (C), the hold display LED 513 of the third hold display portion 511c corresponding to the third hold icon 83c displayed as the white mode with an effect blinks in white. Although the first hold icon 83a is displayed in blue, the first hold display portion 511a is displayed as white lighting.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, the synchronization control between the hold icon 83 and the hold display unit 511 is not executed. However, for example, the hold icon 83 and the hold display unit 511 are trusted from the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern table. The degree of synchronization may be controlled.

  (D) represents a state in which the result of the currently running variable display game is finalized.

  (E) represents a state in which the display of the hold memory (hold icon 83) moves to the left one by one and a new variable display game is started. On the screen, the stored memory that is currently executing the variable display game is displayed in blue in the digestion hold display area 88, and a butterfly 73b appears as a notice suggestion character 73 from the right side. Also in the hold display unit 510, the display of each hold display unit 511 moves to the left one by one, and the second hold display unit 511b blinks. The hold display LED 513 of the fourth hold display section 511d and the fourth hold icon 83d that is the display behind are turned off.

  (F) shows that the butterfly 73b stays at the upper part of the blinking second hold display section 511b, and the hold display LED 513 changes from white to yellow (preliminary lighting mode) and at the same time the petal 512 of the second hold display section 511b The expanded state is shown. The fact that the mechanical hold memory 511 has flowered informs that the reliability of the second hold memory is high. The expansion operation of the petals 512 is only once, but the expansion operation may be executed a number of times corresponding to the promotion stage (for example, twice if the promotion is performed in two stages).

  Even if the effect mode of the second hold display unit 511b changes from the closed state to the open state, the display mode of the second hold icon 83b behind does not change. It is necessary to change the display control of the hold display icon between the case where the hold display unit 510 is operated and the case where the hold display unit 510 is not operated by changing the display of the hold icon 83 in the rear to the same display transition as when the hold display unit 510 is not operated. And the control load on the production control device 300 can be reduced.

  (G) represents a state in which the butterfly 73b that has remained at the upper part of the second hold display section 511b has taken off. The second on-hold display unit 511b is in a state where it continuously emits light and blooms in a yellow manner.

  (H) represents a state in which the result of the running variable display game is confirmed.

  (I) represents a state in which a new variable display game is started and the display of the hold icon 83 on the back and the hold display section 511 on the front are moved to the left one by one. In (G), the second hold display portion 511b that was in the flowering state is closed, and the first hold display portion 511a is in the flowering state.

  (J) represents a state in which a new winning occurs, a new display is made on the third hold display unit 511c and the third hold icon 83c behind, and the result of the running variable display game is confirmed. Yes. The new winning is displayed in the blue state in the hold icon 83 at the rear, but is displayed in the white form in the mechanical hold memory 511.

  (K) represents a state in which a new variable display game is started and the display of the back hold icon 83 and the front hold display section 511 are moved to the left one by one. The reserved storage that has been started is displayed in the effect white mode in the hold icon 83 at the rear, but is displayed in the yellow mode in the mechanical hold memory 511, so that it is displayed in the digest pending display area 88 in the yellow mode. Has been. Moreover, the 1st holding | maintenance display part 511a which was a flowering state in (J) will be in a flowering state.

  (L) represents a state in which the hold display unit 510 is lowered from the effect position to the standby position. When the fluctuating display game of on-hold memory that has flowered is started, the on-hold display unit 510 returns to the standby position. In addition, when there are a plurality of on-hold display units 511 in the flowering state, the on-hold display unit 510 moves down to the standby position at the timing when all the on-hold storages in the flowering state are consumed.

  (M) represents a state in which the variable display game being executed is in the reach state, and each on-hold display LED 513 of the on-hold display unit 510 in the standby position emits light. All of the first to fourth on-hold display units 511 are in the closed state, and when in the closed state, the light from the on-hold display LED 513 is applied to the light transmitting lens unit 503 as convergent light.

  (N) represents a state in which the effect of the first half of the SP2 reach is being executed. The second hold display unit 511b and the fourth hold display unit 511d at the standby position are in a flowering state, and the second hold display unit 511b and the translucent lens unit 503 on the front surface of the fourth hold display emit light greatly. When the petal 512 is in a flowering state, the light from the hold display LED 513 is irradiated to the translucent lens portion 503 as diffused light.

  (O) represents a state in which the effect of the latter half of the SP2 reach is being executed. All the first to fourth on-hold display units 511 in the standby position are in a flowering state, and the translucent lens units 503 on the front surface of all the on-hold display units 511 emit a large amount of light. The reach production enters the second half, and the higher the reliability, the more the flowering state is achieved, and the light emission effect by diffused light is executed.

  Thus, in the lighting change main effect, the suggestion effect by the notice suggesting character 73, the change effect of the lighting mode of the hold display LED 513, and the flowering effect by the movable member 512 are executed. Even if the hold display unit 510 returns to the standby position, the light emission effect of the hold display LED 513 and the operation effect of the movable member are executed, and the light emission effect of the translucent lens unit 503 is executed by the irradiation light of the hold display LED 513.

[Operation of hold display unit and screen transition 1 when Gase production is executed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the operation and screen display of the hold display unit 510 when the gass effect by the mechanical hold storage 511 is executed will be described. Here, a description will be given of a gasse effect in which the hold display unit 510 is lowered to the standby position immediately after being raised to the effect position.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the display at the bottom of the screen when the display effect is executed by the lifting / lowering operation of the hold display unit 510 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 111 (A) shows a state in which three reserved memories are displayed. The first hold icon 83a is displayed in blue, the second hold icon 83b is displayed in white, and the third hold icon 83c is displayed in white with an effect applied. In addition, the mode display section 87 informs the player that something will happen when the number of holds becomes four, such as “Now hold four ...”. Further, in the digestion pending display area 88, the reliability of the pending storage of the currently running variable display game is displayed in white, and all the special symbols on the left, middle and right are changing. The hold display unit 510 is in a standby state at the standby position.

  (B) represents a state in which the fourth reserved storage is displayed in FIG. The mode display section 87 displays “Yes, 4th!” To notify that the number of holds has reached 4, and the hold storage for the winning is displayed on the fourth hold icon 83d. In addition, the hold display unit 510 starts to rise from the standby position.

  (C) represents a state in which the hold display unit 510 is raised to the effect position. Although the hold display unit 510 has been raised to the effect position, the mode display unit 87 displays “normal mode”, notifying that it is not the mechanical advance notice mode. That is, depending on the player, it can be understood from the display on the mode display unit 87 that the effect is a gasse effect.

  (D) represents a state in which the hold display unit 510 is lowered to the standby position. The register mark 73a jumps from the upper part of the third hold display portion 511c to the right side of the screen so as to give an impression that the current rise of the hold display unit 510 is a gasse effect. Note that the display of the backward hold icon 83 is the same before and after the ascent of the hold unit, but in the case of a change notice, the third hold icon 83c is attached when the hold display unit 510 is lowered. The effect that is on may disappear.

  As described above, as one pattern of the gaze effect using the hold display unit 510, the hold display unit 510 temporarily rises and immediately falls to the standby position.

  The gasse effect described here is an example, and illustration is omitted. For example, the gaze effect where the hold display unit 510 descends to the standby position in accordance with the timing when the notice suggestion character 73 flies to the blinking hold display unit 511. May be executed.

[Operation of the hold display unit and screen transition 2 when the gasse effect is executed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the operation and screen display of the hold display unit 510 when the gass effect by the mechanical hold storage 511 is executed will be described. Here, a description will be given of a gaze effect in which the hold display unit 511 in which the hold display LED 513 is blinking does not bloom and the effect ends in the closed state.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the hold display unit 510 and the display at the bottom of the screen when the notice effect character 73 is executed by the notice suggestion character 73 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 112 (A) shows a state in which the hold display unit 510 is raised to the effect position and three hold memories are displayed. The second on-hold display unit 511b is blinking to notify that the reliability is high. In addition, a butterfly 73b appears from the right side of the screen and faces left. Further, since the hold display unit 510 is in the production state, “mechanical advance notice mode” is displayed on the mode display unit 87. Since the second hold display unit 511b has an effect (blinking), the player is expected that the second hold display unit 511b will shift from the closed state to the open state.

  (B) represents a state in which the butterfly 73b has jumped to the upper side of the second holding display portion 511b.

  (C) represents a state in which the butterfly 73b jumps to the left side of the screen without staying at the second hold display portion 511b. If the butterfly 73b stays on the blinking second hold display portion 511b, the second hold display portion 511b will be in a flowering state, and a higher reliability will be notified, but here, the butterfly 73b appears to stay and stops eventually. Will disappear. The blinking second hold display section 511b continues to blink, and the butterfly 73b may re-fly.

  The notice suggestion character 73 returns to the direction of appearance and out of the frame, but may move out of the direction opposite to the direction of appearance and may out of frame, and the side to be out of frame is determined by lottery. May be.

  In this way, as another pattern of the gaze effect using the hold display unit 510, even if the hold display unit 510 rises and “mechanical notice mode” is displayed on the mode display section 87, the notice suggestion character 73 that has come in is displayed. An effect of flying away without staying in the hold display section 511 is executed. Therefore, the mechanical advance notice mode ends without the blinking hold display section 511 flowering.

(Effects of the first embodiment)
As described above, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the hold display unit (second display unit) 510 is arranged so as to face the standby hold display area 80 (first display unit), and the game progresses. Accordingly, the second display unit 510 moves to the standby position (first position) or the effect position (second position). Therefore, since the hold display by the first display unit 80 appears and disappears due to the movement of the second display unit 510 and the appearance of the hold display changes, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the second display unit 510 is moved from the first position to the second position based on the result of the prior determination (prefetching). Therefore, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that a special result may be obtained by moving the second display unit 510.

  In addition, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when the number of reserved memories reaches a predetermined number, the second display unit 510 moves from the first position to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a desire to increase the number of memories in order to move the second display unit 510, and promote active participation in the game.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the second display unit 510 covers and hides the first display unit 80 from the player, and holds separately from the hold icon 83 displayed on the first display unit 80. The display unit 511 executes a notification effect (mechanism hold notice) about the reliability of the hold memory. The holding display unit 511 includes a movable member (petal) 512 and a holding display LED (holding light) 513, and emits the holding light 513 as a warning lighting mode based on the result of prior determination. Further, based on the result of the prior determination, the movable member 512 executes a notification effect of reliability with a mechanical operation. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce the notice lighting mode, and it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for a special result. Further, it is possible to provide a player with a new and comical notification effect that has never been seen before.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the hold effect is not executed when the second display unit is at the first position, while the hold effect is executed when the second display unit is at the second position. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player with the hold effect by the second display unit, and the interest of the game is effectively improved.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the shielding wall portion (shielding portion) 502 is provided in front of the second display portion 510 at the first position. For this reason, when the second display unit 510 is in the first position, the visual recognition of the second display unit 510 is restricted, and the presentation effect when the second display unit 510 moves to the second position is significantly improved. To do.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the shielding unit 502 includes the translucent lens unit 503 that can transmit the light emitted from the holding lamp 513. Even if the second display unit 510 is lowered to the first position, if the SP reach is being performed, the second display unit 510 emits the holding lamp 513 at the first position and opens and closes the movable member 512. Therefore, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation by the convergent light or diffused light irradiated on the translucent lens portion 503.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when the notice suggestion character 73 suggesting execution of the mechanical hold advance notice (hold display by the second display section) jumps to the upper part of the hold display section 511 and moves. The member 512 expands from the closed flower state to the flowering state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in executing the mechanical hold notice.

  In addition, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the second display unit 510 temporarily rises and then immediately falls, and the on-hold display unit 511 in a blinking state is displayed by the notice suggestion character 73. Gase production is performed that jumps over the top and eventually disappears without staying anywhere. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further enhanced in executing the mechanical hold notice.

  In addition, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the display mode of the hold display unit 511 is separate display control independent of the hold icon 83, so that the control load of the effect control device 300 can be reduced. it can.

[Modification 3 of the first embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 114.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), only a slight gap is provided between the hold display unit 510 and the display device 41. Therefore, when the hold display unit 510 rises. The player can no longer see the hold icon 83 behind. On the other hand, in this modified example, by providing a larger gap between the hold display unit 510 and the display device 41 than in the first embodiment, the hold icon 83 on the back is visually recognized depending on the player's viewpoint. It becomes possible.

  FIG. 113 is a perspective view of a holding display unit case 500 in which the holding display unit 510 according to the third modification of the first embodiment of the present invention is in the initial position (standby position, first position).

  FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view of the hold display unit case 500 and the display device 41 according to Modification 3 of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  In this modification, for example, a width of about one finger is provided between the hold display unit 510 indicated by “W” in FIG. 113 and the display device 41. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 114, even if the hold display unit 510 rises to the effect position (the operation position, the second position), the player moves the line of sight upward to move the lower part of the screen from above the hold display unit 510. A part or all of the hold icon 83 can be visually recognized by looking into it.

  Since the display mode of the hold icon 83 is maintained regardless of the raising and lowering of the hold display unit 510, the player can confirm the display mode and the change mode of both the hold display unit 511 and the hold icon 83 and enjoy the notice effect. be able to.

(Effects of Modification 3 of First Embodiment)
As described above, according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, even if the hold display unit (second display unit) 510 rises, the player holds the hold displayed on the first display unit 80. The notice effect can be enjoyed while watching the hold memory of both the icon 83 and the hold display unit 511 provided in the second display unit 510. Thereby, the player can see the notice effect by the first display unit 80 and the notice effect by the second display unit 510 by shifting the viewpoint, so that the player can be provided with a novel notice effect that has never existed before. Can do.

  Furthermore, even if the display mode of the hold icon 83 does not change, the movable member 512 can be flowered to increase the player's expectation, and by connecting to the big hit, the reliability of the mechanical hold notice is given to the player. You can have it.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the mechanical hold advance notice for notifying the reliability is executed by the hold display unit 510 that moves up and down, the hold display LED 513 whose display mode changes, and the petal 512 that opens and closes. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, four independent box-shaped box portions 514 corresponding to the reserved storage display are provided, and the doors (movable members) 515 provided in the respective box portions 514 are opened and closed and the inside The hold notice effect that notifies the reliability by the illumination from is executed.

[Pending display unit]
FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the display device 41 and the hold display unit 510 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the hold display unit 510 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  As shown in FIG. 115, in this embodiment, the reliability is notified by the box unit 514 provided in the hold display unit 510. The hold display unit 510 is installed in front of the lower part of the display device 41, and the line of sight of the lower part of the display device 41 is blocked by the box part 514.

  The hold display unit 510 includes four box portions 514 from the first box portion 514a to the fourth box portion 514d. The box unit 514 is a box-shaped production device, and includes a pair of doors 515 formed of a light-transmitting member on the front surface. In addition, an operation suggesting light emitting unit 516 displayed as “PUSH” is provided below the pair of doors 515. When the effect button 25 is operated at the timing when the operation suggesting light emitting unit 516 emits light, the door 515 is opened. The

  A notice character 74 (see FIG. 119) is displayed below the display device 41 that overlaps the box portion 514. When the door 515 is opened, the notice character 74 can be viewed in detail. Since the door 515 is composed of a translucent member, the player can visually recognize the notice suggestion silhouette 74 f (see FIG. 121) holding the notice suggestion caclata 73 even through the door 515.

  Note that the digestion hold display area 88 may be set on the display screen of the display device 41 to display a hold icon 83 during execution of the variable display game.

  In addition, the hold display unit 510 may be fixedly disposed at a lower portion of the display device 41 or may be provided so as to be lifted and lowered from within the stage 43.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the hold display unit 510 of this embodiment includes a box portion 514, an LED substrate 518, and a unit base 520 in order from the top. The box unit 514 includes a pair of doors 515 on the front surface, and includes a bottom lens unit 517 that scatters light irradiated from below on the bottom surface. Further, the back surface of the box unit 514 is in a state of being pulled out so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display device 41 or is configured by a transparent member. Moreover, since the box part 514 is entirely composed of a light-transmitting member, the box part 514 itself emits light by irradiation light from below, and each box part 514 is replaced with reserved storage (hold display). .

  The LED board 518 includes a hold lighting LED (holding light) 518a that irradiates the upper box portion 514 from below, and an operation suggestion LED 518b that causes the operation suggestion light emitting portion 516 displayed as “PUSH” to emit light. The hold lighting LED 518a can emit a plurality of colors.

  The unit base 520 includes a lens 519 that scatters light emitted from the rear to the front, and includes an operation suggesting light emitting unit 516 that displays “PUSH”. Although the operation suggestion light-emitting portion 516 is not directly operated by the player's hand, for example, the operation suggestion light-emitting portion 516 can be directly operated by the player's hand by using the cover glass 14 as a touch panel member. Also good.

[Special figure 1 hold notice setting process]
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 hold notice setting process according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the special figure 1 hold advance notice setting process of the first embodiment, the initial display information and final display information of the hold icon 83, the mechanical hold advance notice information, the change suggestion notice effect, etc. are set. In the hold notice setting process shown in FIG. 1, whether or not a hold notice effect is executed, selection of a notice character 74, and the like are set.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining a notice character determination table according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating the notice character 74 according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 300 first refers to the special figure 1 reservation storage area 360 (B4001), and determines whether or not the number of reservations is 1 or more (B4002).

  When the number of holds is not 1 or more, that is, when the number of holds is 0 (the result of B4002 is “N”), there is no need to set a hold notice effect, so the effect control device 300 performs this process. finish.

  When the number of holds is 1 or more (the result of B4002 is “Y”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the continuous notice information is set (B4003).

  When the continuous notice information is set (the result of B4003 is “Y”), it is not necessary to set the hold notice effect, so the effect control device 300 ends this process.

  If the continuous notice information is not set (the result of B4003 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the hold notice information is set (B4004).

  When the hold notice information is not set (the result of B4004 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the process.

  When the hold notice information is set (the result of B4004 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the hold number in FIG. 1 is 1 (B4005), and the hold number is Only when it is 1 (the result of B4005 is “Y”), the remaining fluctuation time is acquired (B4006), and it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time (B3702).

  If the remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the predetermined time (the result of B3702 is “N”), sufficient time for executing the hold notice effect cannot be secured, and the effect control device 300 is necessary for the hold notice effect. This process ends without setting information.

  When the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time (the result of B3702 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 acquires stop symbol information (B4007), and determines whether or not the stop symbol is a big hit symbol. (B3706).

  When the stop symbol is a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines to execute the hold notice effect at a high rate (B4011). Even if it is a big hit, the hold notice effect is not necessarily executed, so uncertainty is brought about in the hold notice effect, that is, unexpectedness is provided to the player and the interest of the game is improved.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 acquires the variation pattern information (B4008), and determines whether or not the variation pattern causes reach. Determination is made (B4009).

  If it is not a variation pattern in which reach occurs (result of B4009 is “N”), sufficient time for executing the hold notice effect cannot be secured, so the effect control device 300 has information necessary for the hold notice effect. This process ends without setting.

  In the case of a variation pattern in which reach occurs (result of B4009 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute the hold notice effect with a probability corresponding to the type of reach (B4010). That is, the higher the reach, the longer the hold notice effect is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute the hold notice effect (B4012). When the hold notice effect is not executed (the result of B4012 is “N”), the effect control device 300 This processing is terminated without setting information necessary for the hold notice effect.

  When executing the holding notice effect (the result of B4012 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 acquires the variation pattern information again (B4013), and the notice character 74 based on the notice character determination table shown in FIG. Is determined (B4014). That is, the more reliable the reach character 74 (see FIG. 119), the higher the reliability.

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the determined hold advance notice information in the hold storage area corresponding to the number of holds (B4015), and ends this process.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the notice character 74 is prepared from a character A 74a having a low reliability to a character D 74d having a high reliability, and the light emission color of the hold lighting LED 518a is set for each character. Since the characters A 74a to D 74d all have similar outlines, it is difficult for the player to distinguish even when displayed as the notice suggestion silhouette 74f (see FIG. 121).

  When the lighting information is set, the hold lighting LED 518a is lit in white when the variable display game is started, and is lit in a color corresponding to the notice character 74 set when the door 515 is opened. When the notice character 74 is not set, the lighting in the white mode continues until the variable display game ends. Note that the hold lighting LED 518a may be lit or blinked at a timing when reach is reached.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Display Processing]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special figure 1 hold display process according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the special figure 1 hold display process in the present embodiment, lighting information of the LED board 518 and the like are set.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started (B3801), and only when the fluctuation is started (result of B3801 is “Y”), is based on the lighting information. The hold display section 511 is turned on (B4101).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the hold notice information is set (B4102). When the hold notice information is not set (the result of B4102 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes the processes after B4111 without executing the processes from B4103 to B4110.

  When the hold notice information is set (the result of B4102 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 displays the notice suggestion silhouette 74f in the display area (that is, the display screen) behind the target hold display section 511. It is displayed (B4103). The notice suggestion silhouette 74f is a character A74a to character D74d displayed as silhouettes. Since all the characters have similar outlines and the door 515 has a scattering portion due to minute unevenness, when the notice suggestion silhouette 74f is seen through the door 515, it is visually recognized by the player as an overall jerk. For this reason, the character A 74 a to the character D 74 d cannot be easily distinguished from the notice suggestion silhouette 74 f through the door 515. Alternatively, all the notice suggestion silhouettes 74f may be the same silhouette.

  Next, the production control device 300 turns on the operation suggesting light emitting unit 516 of the target hold display unit 511 (B4104), and determines whether or not the production button 25 is operated (B4105). As described above, when the effect button 25 is operated at the timing when the operation suggesting light emitting unit 516 emits light, the door 515 is opened. In addition to the effect button 25, a dedicated operation unit may be provided for the operation suggesting light emitting unit 516.

  When the effect button 25 is operated (the result of B4105 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 displays the notice character 74 in the display area (that is, the display screen) behind the target hold display unit 511. (B4106).

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the opening information of the door 515 for a predetermined time to the target hold display unit 511, and opens the door 515 (B4107).

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the advance lighting information that is information for turning on the emission color corresponding to the advance notice character 74 at the timing when the door 515 is opened in the target holding storage unit (B4108).

  Next, the production control device 300 clears the setting of the hold advance notice information (B4109), and turns off the operation suggesting light emitting unit 516 (B4110).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the door 515 is open (B4111). If the door 515 is not open (the result of B4111 is “N”), the present process is terminated.

  When it is open (the result of B4111 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the change has started (B4112), and when the change has started (the result of B4112 is Only for “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (B4113).

  When the opening time has elapsed (the result of B4113 is “Y”), or when the change has not started (the result of B4112 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the closing information of the door 515. (B4114), the door 515 is closed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the opening time has not elapsed (the result of B4113 is “N”), it is not necessary to close the door 515, and thus the production control device 300 ends this processing without setting the closing information. .

[Description of operation of the hold display unit]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the hold display unit 510 according to the second embodiment of this invention. The hatched portion in the figure indicates that the light is not emitted and is in a dark state.

  FIG. 121A shows a state where there are two reserved memories. Both the first box part 514a and the second box part 514b emit light in a white manner. The light emission of each box portion 514 is caused by the hold lighting LED 518a. All of the operation suggesting light emitting portions 516 are turned off.

  (B) represents a state where the third box portion 514c emits white light and the third operation suggesting light emitting portion 516c emits light because a new winning has occurred. (BA) is a front view of the third box portion 514 c at the same timing as (B), and the notice suggestion silhouette 74 f is displayed on the screen, and the notice suggestion silhouette 74 f can be visually recognized through the door 515. Also, (BA) indicates that the player is operating the effect button 25 at the timing when the third operation suggesting light emitting unit 516c is emitting light.

  (C) represents a state in which the door 515 of the third box portion 514c is opened and the light emission mode of the third box portion 514c is changed from white to green. (CA) represents a state in which the door 515 is opened and the character C74c displayed on the screen can be confirmed. The green aspect that is the emission color of the box portion 514 is a color corresponding to the character C74c. In addition, in the timing of (B), when the 3rd operation suggestion light emission part 516c turns off without operating the production button 25, the 3rd box part 514c does not change to a green mode.

  (D) represents a state in which a new variable display game is started, the third box portion 514c is turned off, and the second box portion 514b emits light in a green manner.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the box unit 514 emits light as a hold memory, and the notice suggestion silhouette 74f is displayed and the operation suggestion light emitting unit 516 emits light for the hold memory having a high expectation. Then, when the player operates the effect button 25 at the timing when the operation suggesting light emitting portion 516 emits light, the door 515 is opened and the notice character 74 can be confirmed, and at the same time, the box portion 514 changes to a light emission color corresponding to the notice character 74. To do.

  It should be noted that the first to fourth operation suggesting light emitting portions 516 are sequentially turned on, and the effect button 25 is operated at a timing when the operation suggesting light emitting portion 516 of the box portion 514 in which the notice suggestion silhouette 74f is displayed. Only when this is done, the door 515 may be opened. In this case, it is necessary to perform a pushing operation by the player, and the game performance is improved.

(Effect of the second embodiment)
As described above, according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the box unit 514 included in the second display unit 510 emits light as reserved memory, and the notice suggestion silhouette 74f is displayed for reserved memory with high expectation. While being displayed, the operation suggesting light emitting unit 516 emits light. When the player operates the effect button 25 at the timing when the operation suggesting light emitting portion 516 emits light, the door portion 515 is opened and the box portion 514 changes to a light emitting color corresponding to the notice character 74. For this reason, the fun of the game can be enhanced by a novel production that has never been seen before.

  It is also possible to turn on all the operation suggesting light emitting sections 516 in order, and when the player operates the effect button 25 at the timing when the target operation suggesting light emitting section 516 is turned on, the door 515 is opened. Therefore, when the timing is finely matched by the pushing operation, it is possible to give the player a sense of achievement and improve the game performance.

(Third embodiment)
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when a highly reliable hold memory is generated, there is a case where a reliability notification effect accompanied by a mechanical lifting operation and an opening / closing operation is executed. In contrast, in the third embodiment, during the non-electric support, the hold display unit 510 located at the lower part of the center case 40 is connected to the movable effect member (movable member) 44 when the electronic support state is entered. It moves (refer to FIG. 126), and finally the reliability is notified by the presence or absence of the drop effect of the movable effect member 44. It is assumed that the variable display game is executed by prioritizing the start memory of FIG. 2 over the start memory of FIG.

[Game board]
FIG. 122 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  In the game board 30 according to the third embodiment, the warp device 42 is provided only on the left side of the center case 40, and four general winning holes 35 are provided in the game area 32 on the left side. The general winning opening 35 located at the bottom of the general winning openings 35 is a connected general winning opening in which two general winning openings 35 are connected horizontally.

  In the game area 32 on the right side, a normal figure start gate 34, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 that opens a movable piece 37b for a predetermined period when a normal figure fluctuation display game is hit, and a special figure fluctuation display game big hit There is provided a right variable prize winning device (right attacker) 39 that sometimes opens and closes an opening / closing member to open an attacker (upper prize winning opening) for a predetermined period.

  In the lower game area 32, a lower variable prize winning device (lower attacker) that opens and closes an attacker (lower major prize winning port) for a predetermined period by operating an opening / closing member at the time of big hit of the special figure 1 start winning prize port 36 and the special figure variation display game. 39 is provided. In the game board 30 according to the present embodiment, the right strike is advantageous for the player during normal hitting, during big hits and during electric support (during probability change, short time).

  In addition, a special figure 1 fluctuation display LED 66 and a special figure 2 fluctuation display LED 67 are arranged in order from the top on the right edge of the center case 40 between the normal start gate 34 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  Inside the center case 40, a movable effect member 44 simulating an insect face, a display device 41, a warp device 42, and a stage 43 are arranged in this order from the top. Further, a decoration member 46 that imitates the face of a caterpillar is provided inside the warp device 42 so as to be hidden behind the warp device 42 by about a half, and the normal variation winning device 37 from the lower right of the decoration member 46 is further provided. A holding display unit 510 is provided in the horizontal direction.

  The hold display unit 510 includes four hold display portions 511 for displaying the start memory number, and is attached to a back surface structure (not shown). The hold display section 511 includes a hold display LED 513 inside and can emit light, and each hold display section 511 can be connected and moved. Then, the hold display unit 510 can move to a position (effect position, operation position, second position) corresponding to the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d at the time of electric support (during probability change, short time) (FIG. 5). 126).

  As shown in FIG. 122, when the hold display unit 510 is in the initial position (standby position, first position), the hold display unit 511 has about 4/5 hidden by the stage 43 and only the upper 1/5. Visible from the front. A hold icon 83 of FIG. 1 is displayed behind the hold display portion 511 so as to overlap. That is, from the front, the stage 43, the hold display unit 510, and the display device 41 are arranged in this order, and the hold icon 83 displayed on the display device 41 is displayed overlapping the back of the hold display unit 510 (hold display unit 511). The

[Configuration in the center case]
FIG. 123 is a front view inside the center case 40 excluding the stage 43 and the warp device 42 according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  The movable effect member 44 is movable from the initial position shown in FIG. 123 to the front of the display device 41, that is, downward. An LED (not shown) is provided inside, a light emission effect is possible, and the antenna (movable part) 44a can be operated up and down. The state of the antenna 44a also changes depending on the gaming state, and from non-electric support, the first state (low mode) when the antenna 44a is lowered to the second state (high mode), where the antenna 44a is increased during electric support. And migrate.

  The decoration device (decoration member) 46 incorporates an LED (not shown), and is configured to perform a light emission effect at a predetermined timing and to be able to vibrate and move.

  The hold display unit 511 is a first hold display unit 511a, a second hold display unit 511b, a third hold display unit 511c, and a fourth hold display unit 511d in order from the left. Display), and during power support, it emits light as a hold memory (hold display) in FIG. In FIG. 123, all the hold display portions 511 are hatched, but in this embodiment as well, the hatched state represents a non-light emitting state.

  The normal variation winning device 37 has a general diagram display LED 37e that is turned on when a normal variation display game is won, and is turned off when the game is lost, and the movable piece 37b is opened. Then, the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d is opened. For example, the multi-display LED 37e may be lit when the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d is open, and may be turned on when the special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d is closed.

  On the upper left of the screen of the display device 41, there are provided a special figure 1 hold number display section 89a for displaying the hold number of special figure 1 and a special figure 2 hold number display section 89b for displaying the hold number of special figure 2. Although the special figure 1 reservation number display part 89a and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 89b are displayed with the same number of numbers, they are displayed with different background colors and are designed to be easily distinguished at a glance. In addition, the position in the upper left where neither the special figure 1 hold number display portion 89a nor the special figure 2 hold number display portion 89b is shielded by the movable effect member 44 so that the hold number can be confirmed even when the movable effect member 44 moves downward. Is displayed.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating the light emission colors of the hold display unit 511 and the hold icon 83 according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  In the present embodiment, the hold display unit 511 and the hold icon 83 emit light with the same emission color for one hold storage. The emission color is divided into “white”, “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow” according to the reliability that the variable display game has a special result (big hit). Emits light.

[Description of the operation of the hold display section]
FIG. 125 is a front view inside the center case 40 for explaining the state of the hold display unit 511 in the non-electric support state according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 126 is a front view in the center case 40 for explaining the state of the hold display unit 511 at the time of the electric support transition according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  The non-electric support state is a normal state (normal game state) or a big hit (special game state), and the electric support state is a specific game state during probability change or short time.

  In the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 125, the hold display unit 511 is located at an initial position in front of the hold icon 83 so as to overlap the hold icon 83 of FIG. That is, since the holding display unit 511 is located at a position continuous with the decorative member 46 imitating the face of a caterpillar, the decorative member 46 and the four holding display units 511 are integrated so that the caterpillar lies. . When the holding display unit 510 is in the initial position, each holding display unit 511 emits light as holding storage (holding display) in FIG.

  When the electric support is performed, the four on-hold display units 511 move vertically to the right side position (effect position) of the display device 41 as illustrated in FIG. 126. In other words, the first hold display unit 511a is located at a position where it is connected to the movable effect member 44, and the normal variation winning device 37 having the movable piece 37b imitating a worm needle is connected to the right side of the fourth hold display unit 511d. The movable effect member 44, the hold display unit 511, and the normal variation winning device 37 are integrated to look like a large (powered up) caterpillar. When the hold display unit 510 is in the production position, the hold display unit 511 emits light as the hold storage (hold display) in FIG.

  Note that the base member to which the hold display unit 511 is attached is configured by the flexible connecting member 520a so that the first hold display unit 511a to the fourth hold display unit 511d are connected and operated.

  Since the special figure 1 hold icon 83 continues to be displayed on the hold display part 511 after the hold display part 511 has moved, the player can use the special figure 1 hold icon 83 to store the special figure 1 hold memory (hold display). Can be confirmed.

  A hold icon 83 of FIG. 2 is displayed behind the hold display portion 511 during the electric support (that is, behind the hold display portion 511 at the effect position). Therefore, even if the hold display unit 511 breaks down, the player can check the hold storage (hold display) in FIG. 2 by changing the viewpoint.

[Special figure 1 hold notice setting process]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 hold notice setting process according to the third embodiment of this invention. In the special figure 1 hold advance notice setting process of the present embodiment, initial display information and final display information of the hold icon 83, and change suggestion advance notice information are set.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining a hold change notice determination table 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, in which (A) shows a hold change notice determination table 1 for winning, and (B) shows an off hold. It is a figure explaining the change notice determination table.

  The effect control device 300 first acquires the stop symbol information of the target hold memory, and determines whether or not the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol (B3706).

  If it is a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines the final hold display mode based on the hold change notice determination table 1 shown in FIG. 128 (A) (B3707).

  When it is not a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines the final hold display mode based on the hold change notice determination table 2 shown in FIG. 128B (B3708).

  Next, the production control apparatus 300 sets the final hold display mode determined in the hold storage area of the target hold storage (B3709), and sets the hold change timing determination table corresponding to the final hold display mode (B3720). . The hold change timing determination table refers to the tables 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines the hold change timing (hold change pattern) based on the number of holds (B3721), and displays the hold change timing information and the initial hold display mode in the hold storage area of the target hold memory. Set (B3722).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not there is a change after the start winning (B3723). As described above, the case where there is a change after the start winning is a case where the initial display mode of the hold icon 83 displayed at the time of winning and the final display mode displayed at the time of digestion are different.

  When there is a change after the start winning (the result of B3723 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the change suggestion mode information in the reserved storage area of the target reserved storage (B3718), and this processing Exit. The change suggestion in the present embodiment is, for example, the application of an effect to the hold icon 83, and the gradation of the hold display unit 511.

  When there is no change after the start winning prize (the result of B3723 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the change suggestion notice mode is set by a lottery (B4201), and the result of the lottery changes as a result. It is determined whether or not the suggestion notice mode is executed (B4202).

  When the change suggestion notice mode is executed (the result of B4202 is “Y”), the production control device 300 sets the change suggestion mode information in the reserved storage area of the target reserved storage (B3718), The process ends.

  When the change suggestion notice mode is not executed (the result of B4202 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 sets information indicating no change suggestion mode in the hold storage area of the target hold storage (B3705), and this processing Exit.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 winning occurs, the special figure 2 reservation notice setting process is executed, but since it is the same process as the special figure 1 reservation notice setting process, illustration and description thereof are omitted.

[Hold display process]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of hold display processing according to the third embodiment of this invention. This process is a process for executing the display control of the hold icon 83 based on the information set in the special figure 1 hold advance notice setting process and the special figure 2 hold advance notice setting process.

  The effect control device 300 first displays the special figure 1 reserved memory number in the special figure 1 numeric reserved display area and the special figure 2 reserved memory number in the special figure 2 numeric reserved display area (B4301, B4302).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the change has started (B4303). If the change has not started (the result of B4303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 displays the hold display. The execution process is executed (B4314), and this process ends. The hold display execution process is a process of displaying the hold icon 83 based on the hold display information and the change suggestion mode information. The hold icon 83 in the present embodiment has any one of “white”, “white with effect”, “blue”, “blue with effect”, “red”, “red with effect”, and “rainbow”. Is displayed.

  When the change has started (result of B4303 is “Y”), the production control device 300 sets the hold change timing information in the hold storage area of the hold memory of the target special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is checked whether or not there is a reserved storage that has been made (B4304, B4305).

  When there is no hold storage in which the hold change timing information is set (the result of B4305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes a hold display execution process (B4314), and ends this process.

  When there is a hold storage in which the hold change timing information is set (the result of B4305 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the corresponding hold display mode information based on the change notice timing information (B4306). .

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a change hold icon 83 (B4307), and when there is a change hold icon 83 (the result of B4307 is “Y”), output of the hold change sound. Is set (B4308). When there are a plurality of hold icons 83 that change, the output of the change change sound for the number of changes may be set, or the output of a special hold change sound may be set.

  Next, the production control device 300 checks whether there is a hold memory that changes to the final hold display mode, and determines (B4309, B4310).

  When there is a hold icon 83 that changes to the final hold display mode (the result of B4310 is “Y”), the production control device 300 checks whether there is a hold memory being displayed in the gas change suggestion mode, Determine (B4311, B4312).

  When there is no hold icon 83 that changes to the final hold display mode (result of B4310 is “N”), the production control device 300 has no change suggestion mode information in the hold storage area of the target hold storage. The information is changed (B4313), the hold display execution process is executed (B4314), and this process ends.

  In addition, when there is a pending storage that is being displayed in the manner change suggestion mode (the result of B4312 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the processes of B4313 and B4314, and ends this process.

  In the case where there is no pending storage being displayed in the manner change suggestion mode (the result of B4312 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the process of B4314 and ends this process.

[Functional action processing]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an accessory operation process according to the third embodiment of this invention. This process is a process for setting operation information of the hold display unit 511 and the movable effect member 44.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the current big hit ending is in progress (B4401). When the big hit ending is in progress (the result of B4401 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to shift to the electric support state after the big hit ends (B4402).

  When transitioning to the electric support state (the result of B4402 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 moves the hold display unit 510 to the second position (the effect position) between the movable effect member 44 and the normal variation winning device 37. ) (B4403), and the antenna 44a is converted from the first state to the second state (B4404).

  When the big hit ending is not in progress (the result of B4401 is “N”), or when the transition to the electric support state is not made after the big hit ends (the result of B4402 is “N”), the effect control device 300 includes the hold display unit 510 and Since there is no need to set the operation of the movable effect member 44, the processing after B4405 is executed without executing the processing of B4403 and B4404.

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the electric support state has ended (B4405). If the electric support state has ended (the result of B4405 is “Y”), the special figure 2 is displayed. It is determined whether there is any pending storage (B4406).

  When there is no reservation memory of FIG. 2 (the result of B4406 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 moves the hold display unit 510 to the first position (B4407).

  In the case where there is a special storage in FIG. 2 (the result of B4406 is “Y”), the production control device 300 sets the production continuation flag (B4407). When the effect continuation flag is set, the effect control device 300 maintains the hold display unit 511 at the second position and maintains the antenna 44a in the second state.

  In order to simplify the control, the hold display unit 510 may be returned to the first position in any state at the end of the electric support state, or a predetermined number of games at which the electric support state ends is reached. The hold display unit 510 may be returned to the first position before.

  If the power support state has not ended (the result of B4405 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes the processes after B4409 without executing the processes from B4406 to B4408.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the effect continuation flag is set (B4409).

  When the effect continuation flag is set (the result of B4409 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a reserved memory of FIG. 2 (B4410).

  In the case where there is no reserved memory in FIG. 2 (the result of B4410 is “N”), the effect control device 300 moves the reserved display unit 510 to the first position (B4411) and moves the antenna 44a from the second state to the second state. The state is converted to 1 state (B4412).

  Note that during the big hit, the hold display unit 510 may be returned to the first position even if there is a hold memory of FIG.

  Next, the production control device 300 performs setting to clear the production continuation flag (B4313).

  When the effect continuation flag is not set (the result of B4409 is “N”), or when there is a reserved memory of FIG. 2 (the result of B4410 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs the process from B4411 to B4413. The processing after B4414 is executed without executing the processing.

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the current state is the non-electric support state (B4414).

  When the current state is not in the non-electric support state, that is, in the electric support state (the result of B4414 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 has the advance target storage in the standby storage areas 363 to 366. Whether or not is checked (B4415, B4416). The notice target hold memory is a hold memory in which information for executing an action effect in which the movable effect member 44 moves so as to drop from an initial position above the display device 41 to an operation position in front of the display device 41 is set.

  Only when the notice mode hold storage is present (the result of B4416 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes a drop suggestion effect that causes the movable effect member 44 to swing (B4417).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the variation of the special figure 2 has been started (B4418), and when the variation of the special figure 2 has been initiated (the result of B4418 is “Y”), the production is performed. The control device 300 determines whether or not the hold notice in FIG. 2 in which the change is started is the notice target hold memory (B4419).

  In the case of the advance notice hold storage (the result of B4419 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the running variation display game is a highly reliable variation pattern of SP2 reach or higher. (B4420).

  When the SP2 reach or higher (the result of B4420 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes a drop effect that moves the movable effect member 44 from the initial position to the operating position and then returns to the initial position. (B4421), and this process ends. Note that the fall effect may be any of the start of fluctuation, the development of the SP reach, the final scene of the reach effect, and the like.

  When fluctuation of special figure 2 is not started (result of B4418 is “N”), execution of held storage is not notice-targeted hold storage (result of B4419 is “N”), and is not more than SP2 reach (The result of B4420 is “N”), the presentation control device 300 ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the current state is the non-electric support state (the result of B4414 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation of the special figure 1 is started (B4422).

  When the variation of the special figure 1 is started (result of B4422 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display game being executed is equal to or greater than SP reach ( B4423) Only when it is SP reach or more (the result of B4423 is “Y”), the fall effect execution timing is determined according to the big hit expectation (reliability) (B4424).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the present time is the drop effect execution timing (B4425), and if it is the drop timing (the result of B4425 is “Y”), the drop by the movable effect member 44 An effect is executed (B4426), and this process is terminated. The fall effect may be at the start of fluctuation, at the time of SP reach development, or at the final scene of the reach effect.

  If it is not the drop timing (the result of B4425 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this process.

  Although the difference between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is determined in B4418 and B4422, the fall effect of the movable effect member 44 is executed without determining whether it is Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2. May be.

  In addition, even in the non-electric support state, there is a case where a long opening in which the normally variable winning device 37 is opened for a long period of time may be executed. Unit 510 may be moved to the second position.

[Direction lighting section lighting process]
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the effect light emitting unit lighting process according to the third embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the reserved storage area in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hold display unit 510 is in the first position (B4501). If it is in the first position (the result of B4501 is “Y”), The hold display mode information of the standby hold storage areas 363 to 366 is acquired (B4502).

  When it is not first (result of B4501 is “N”), the production control device 300 acquires the hold display mode information of the standby hold storage areas 373 to 376 of FIG. 2 (B4503).

  Next, the production control device 300 lights each on-hold display unit 511 based on the obtained on-hold display mode information (B4504), and determines whether or not a fall effect is currently being executed (B4505).

  When the fall effect is being executed (the result of B4505 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variable display game of FIG. 1 is being executed (B4506). Only when the result of B4506 is “Y”, the hold display mode information in the digest hold storage area 362 of FIG. 1 is acquired (B4507).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variable display game of FIG. 2 is being executed (B4508), and only when the game is being executed (result of B4508 is “Y”), Is stored in the digestion storage area 372 (B4509).

  Next, the effect control device 300 lights the movable effect member 44 based on the acquired hold display mode information (B4510), and ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the fall effect is not being executed (the result of B4505 is “N”), since the highly reliable effect is not executed, the effect control device 300 can move the movable effect member based on the default hold display mode information. 44 is turned on in a white mode (B4511), and this process is terminated.

[Explanation of the operation of the movable presentation member and the hold display unit during the electric support]
133A and 133B are transition diagrams illustrating the operation of the movable effect member 44 and the hold display unit 511 during the electric support according to the third embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 133A (A) shows a state where the movable piece 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is opened and the game ball is about to win the special figure 2 starting winning port 37d. In the normal variation winning device 37, the normal variation winning device 37 itself is lit while it is open, and the ◯ mark is lit when the result of the normal variation display game (normal game) is a win. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is “2”, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is “1”. The special figure 1 hold icons 83a and 83b are displayed on the lower side of the display device 41, and the hold icon 83 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the back of the hold display part 511. Therefore, even when the hold display unit 511 stops lighting due to a failure, the player can check the hold icon 83 displayed on the back of the hold display unit 511 by changing the viewpoint.

  The movable effect member 44 emits light in a white manner, and notifies the expectation degree of the variable display game in FIG. Since the electric support is in progress, the antenna 44a of the movable effect member 44 is operating upward.

  (B) represents a state in which the start memory of FIG. 2 is stored by the occurrence of a new start winning in FIG. 2, and the second hold display section 511b is lit in white. In addition, the display device 41 displays a change suggestion notice effect on the second special figure 2 hold icon 83f, and the variable display game corresponding to the start memory of the special figure 2 based on the new start prize is a special result. It is informing that the degree is high. The change suggestion notice effect is not displayed in the periphery of the hold icon 83 but may be a display mode in which the hold icon 83 blinks. Moreover, the movable production | presentation member 44 has repeated the up-and-down movement little by little, and has alert | reported that the reliability of the said new winning is high. The small vertical movement of the movable effect member 44 is continued until the reliability of the high-reliability reserved memory is finally notified. In addition, since the usual game is out of play, the x mark of the normal variation winning device 37 is lit.

  (C) represents a state in which the result of the variable display game being executed is confirmed.

  (D) represents a state in which a new variable display game of FIG. 2 is started. The second reserved memory that is displayed in the white mode on the second hold display unit 511b and displayed with the effect behind is displayed in the blue mode on the first hold display unit 511a. It should be noted that the effect disappears in the rear special figure 2 holding icon 83 because the more accurate reliability is notified in the holding display section 511. The vertical movement of the movable effect member 44 is continued. In the present embodiment, the reservation storage in FIG. 2 is executed with priority over the storage in FIG.

  (E) represents a state in which the movable piece 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is opened and a game ball is about to win a special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d. The vertical movement of the movable effect member 44 is continued.

  (F) shows a state in which the start memory of FIG. 2 is stored by the occurrence of a new start winning in FIG. 2, and the second hold display portion 511b is lit in white. The vertical movement of the movable effect member 44 is continued.

  (G) of FIG. 133B represents a state in which the result of the variable display game that was being executed is confirmed. The vertical movement of the movable effect member 44 is continued.

  (H) represents a state in which a new variable display game of FIG. 2 is started. Since the on-hold storage that has emitted light in the blue mode is executed, the movable effect member 44 also emits light in the blue mode. Although the vertical movement of the movable effect member 44 continues every minute, the operation mode of the movable effect member 44 may be different at the moment when the highly reliable hold storage is executed.

  Then, it is divided into (I1) and (I2) depending on the presence or absence of the drop effect of the movable effect member 44.

  (I1) represents a state in which the movable effect member 44 is stationary while emitting light in a blue manner. For example, when the reliability that is a big hit is low, such as when a reach equal to or less than SP1 reach is performed, the movable effect member 44 stops the vertical movement and notifies that the reliability is low.

  (I2) represents a state in which the movable effect member 44 has suddenly moved downward so that it falls. For example, when the reliability that is a big hit is high, such as when a reach equal to or greater than SP2 reach is executed, the movable effect member 44 executes the fall effect and notifies that the reliability is high.

  As described above, when the variable display game of the hold memory with high reliability is executed, the movable effect member 44 imitating the insect face executes the fall effect, so that the player is provided with unexpectedness and playability. Can do.

  When the overflow prize of FIG. 2 is generated, the six light emitters from the movable effect member 44 to the normal variation prize winning device 37 are integrally brightened, or the green caterpillar effect is shining in green or rainbow colors. It may be displayed by a special display mode such as. In addition, when the reserved memory of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 overflows, a special effect that delights the eyes of the player in the overflow itself, such as the antenna 44a moving up and down, and the size of the reserved icon 83 temporarily increases. May be executed.

(Effect of the third embodiment)
As described above, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the arrangement of the on-hold display unit 511 varies between non-electric support and electric support. Therefore, the player can grasp the game state (by arrangement) by moving the hold display unit 511, and can improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, during the non-electric support, when the hold display unit 511 at the position (first position) corresponding to the special figure 1 start winning opening 36 is in the electric support state. Then, it moves to a position (second position) corresponding to the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d. Therefore, the player's eyes during non-electric support and during electric support can be easily determined, and the player can be concentrated on the game. When the hold display unit 511 is in the first position, the decoration device 46 that imitates the face of a caterpillar and the hold display unit 511 are connected to look like a cute caterpillar, but in the second position. The holding display unit 511 is connected to the movable effect member (movable member) 44 and the normal variation winning device 37, and looks like a powerful green caterpillar that rises on a scale. For this reason, the movement of the hold display unit 510 can provide a game that can entertain the eyes of the player, and a comical impression can be given to the player by the movement of the movable piece 37b of the normal variation winning device 37.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the holding display unit 511 emits light as holding storage (holding display) in FIG. 1 when in the first position, and when in the second position. Emits light as a hold memory (hold display) in FIG. Therefore, the player can recognize whether the reserved memory of FIG. 1 is easily digested or whether the reserved memory of FIG. 2 is easily digested, and the progress of the game is easily understood.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the special figure 1 hold number display part 89a for displaying the hold number of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 hold number display part 89b for displaying the hold number of the special figure 2 are shown. Is provided. Therefore, it is possible to specify both the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 that cannot be specified from the hold display in the hold display unit 511.

  In addition, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, when there is a high possibility of a special result, a drop effect (motion effect) by the movable effect member (movable member) 44 is executed. Further, when the hold display unit 511 is in the second position, the hold storage with the earlier digestion order emits light at a position closer to the movable effect member 44. Therefore, the player's expectation that the movable effect member 44 operates during the variable display game can be increased step by step.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, when the hold display unit 511 is in the second position, the hold storage with the slower digestion order emits light at a position closer to the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the process in which the variable display game is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the hold display unit 511 corresponding to hold storage with high reliability is displayed in a notice display mode according to the reliability. For this reason, the hold light that has become the notice display mode moves toward the movable effect member 44, so that the expectation for the variable display game can be effectively improved.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
In the third embodiment, when a new winning occurs, the first hold display portion 511a and the second hold display portion 511b are displayed in this order. On the other hand, in the first modification of the third embodiment, when a new winning occurs during the electric support, first, the fourth hold display unit 511d is turned on, and then the hold display unit 511 is moved upward. As shown, each hold display section 511 lights up and displays.

[Explanation of lighting operation of hold display section]
FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating the lighting operation of the hold display unit 511 according to the first modification of the third embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 134 (A) shows a state in which the first hold display section 511a emits light and there is one hold memory shown in FIG.

  (B) represents a state in which the movable piece 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is opened.

  (C) represents a state in which a game ball is about to win the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d.

  (D) represents a state in which a new winning is displayed on the fourth hold display section 511d as a highly reliable red mode. Here, the fourth hold display section 511d may emit light simultaneously with the winning, or the fourth hold display section 511d may emit light after the movable piece 37b is closed and the normal variation winning device 37 is turned off. Or, since a plurality of game balls may win during the opening of the movable piece 37b per time, the normal variation winning device 37 is turned off once every time a win is generated at the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d. The fourth hold display section 511d may emit light. If the fourth on-hold display unit 511d emits light after the normal variation winning device 37 is turned off, the state in which the light emission in the on-hold storage is sequentially moved can be produced with a sense of unity.

  (E) represents a state in which the fourth hold display portion 511d is turned off and the third hold display portion 511c emits light in a red manner.

  (F) represents a state in which the third hold display unit 511c is turned off and the second hold display unit 511b emits light in a red manner.

  As described above, in this modification, when a prize is generated in FIG. 2, the light emission portion indicating the reserved memory moves in the order of the normal variable winning device 37, the fourth reserved display unit 511d, and the third reserved display unit 511c. Note that the hold display unit 511 that is the movement source and the hold display unit 511 that is the movement destination may move in small steps at the timing when the hold display unit 511 that emits light moves.

(Effects of Modification 1 of Embodiment 3)
As described above, in the first modification of the third embodiment of the present invention, when the winning in FIG. 2 occurs, the normal variable winning device 37, the fourth hold display unit 511d, and the third hold display unit 511c are sequentially arranged. Each hold display unit 511 sequentially moves and emits light. Therefore, when a highly reliable reserved memory occurs, it is possible to effectively improve the expectation that will be a special result.

  Moreover, a sense of unity is brought about by the six light emitters connected from the normal variation winning device 37 to the movable effect member 44.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
In the third embodiment, the holding display unit 511 has a round shape and one surface emits light, and the holding icon 83 on the rear side cannot be directly recognized in front view. On the other hand, in the second modification of the third embodiment, the hold display unit 511 has a donut shape so that the back hold icon 83 can be directly visually recognized.

  FIG. 135 is a front view of the hold display unit 510 in a state where the hold display unit 511 according to the second modification of the third embodiment of the present invention has not failed.

  FIG. 136 is a front view of the hold display unit 510 in a state where the second hold display unit 511b according to the second modification of the third embodiment of the present invention is out of order.

  In FIG. 135, the first hold display section 511a emits light in white, and the first special figure 2 hold icon 83e behind it also emits light in white. In addition, the second hold display portion 511b emits light in a blue manner, and the second special figure 2 hold icon 83f behind the second hold display portion 511b emits light in a blue manner with an effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 136, the second hold display section 511b is turned off due to a failure, and the second special figure 2 hold icon 83f behind it emits light in blue with an effect.

  Thus, in this modification, since the opening is provided in the holding display unit 511, the player can visually recognize the holding icon 83 behind without changing the viewpoint. In particular, since the hold icon 83 can be directly visually recognized even when the hold icon 83 is not lit due to a failure, the player can check the actual number of holds and the reliability of the hold memory.

  In addition, the center part of the holding | maintenance display part 511 may be comprised with the translucent member which can visually recognize the back rather than opening.

(Effects of Modification 2 of Third Embodiment)
As described above, according to the second modification of the third embodiment of the present invention, since the hold display unit 511 is provided with an opening, the player can use the hold icon 83 at the rear without changing the viewpoint. It is possible to visually recognize.

  Further, even if the hold icon 83 is not lit due to a failure, the player can check the actual number of holds and the reliability of the hold memory without changing the viewpoint. There is no need to interrupt the game or avoid the gaming machine 10 for the reason.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the first to third embodiments, the reserved memory (starting memory) of FIG. 2 is prioritized over the reserved memory (starting memory) of FIG. Since then, the reserved memory of Fig. 1 has been digested in the order of storage. In addition, the hold display unit 511 always executes effects such as light emission as hold storage separately from the hold icon 83. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the order of winning of the start winning of FIG. 1 and the start winning of FIG. 2 is stored, and the holding memory (starting memory) of FIG. 1 and the holding of FIG. The memory (startup memory) is digested in the winning order (memory order) in which the memories are stored. In addition, an effect unit 521 corresponding to the hold display unit 511 executes an effect such as light emission as a decorative member or hold memory depending on the gaming state.

[Game board]
FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  In the game board 30 of the fourth embodiment, the warp device 42 is provided only on the left side of the center case 40 and the four general winning holes 35 are provided in the game area 32 on the left side, as in the third embodiment. .

  In the game area 32 on the right side, in order from the top, the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the opening / closing member are operated at the time of the big hit of the special figure variation display game to change the attacker (upper prize winning opening) for a predetermined period. A winning device 38 is provided. In the normal variation winning device 37, the movable piece 37b is opened at the time of the normal variation display game, and the special variation winning device 37 can be awarded to the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d.

  The lower game area 32 is provided with a start prize opening unit 33 including a special figure 1 start prize opening 36, a special figure 2 start prize opening 37d, a prize distribution mechanism 48, and the like. The start winning opening unit 33 includes a special figure 1 starting winning opening 36, a special figure 2 starting winning opening 37d, a winning distribution mechanism 48 that distributes game balls to the starting winning openings shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. There is provided a flange 33b for restricting the game ball from flowing down to the inner game area 32.

  The start winning port unit 33 includes a special FIG. 1 start winning port 36 at the lower right portion of a substantially rectangular base portion 33a, and a special FIG. 2 start winning port 37d at the lower left portion of the base portion 33a. Moreover, the upper side part of the base part 33a is provided with a hook part 33b for restricting the game ball from flowing down to the inside by a hook-shaped shape having an outward bulge. The end of the flange portion 33b ends at a position slightly closer to the middle of the base portion 33a. For this reason, a right opening 33d having a width capable of winning a game ball from the right side surface to the special figure 1 start winning opening 36 is formed between the end of the collar 33b and the special figure 1 starting winning opening 36. A left opening 33e having the same width is also formed on the left side of the start winning opening unit 33.

  In the center of the heel part 33b, a entrance 33c for allowing a game ball to pass is provided. The entrance 33c causes the heel part 33b to have a right heel part 33b1 (see FIG. 138) and a left heel part 33b2 (see FIG. 138). ). An obstruction nail 32a (see FIG. 138) is disposed at a height similar to the end portion of the starboard portion 33b1 and at a position outside the base portion 33a and in contact with the base portion 33a. Further, the obstacle nail 32a is disposed at a position similar to that of the special figure 1 start winning opening 36 and outside the base portion 33a and at a position in contact with the base portion. Therefore, the obstacle nail 32a is arranged at the upper and lower positions just outside the right opening 33d, and the game ball flowing down near the right opening 33d passes between the upper and lower obstacle nails 32a, so that the right Passing through the opening 33d, it is possible to win a special figure 1 start winning opening 36 from the right side. A similar obstacle nail 32a is also disposed in the left opening 33e, but the description thereof is omitted because it is disposed at a position symmetrical to the right obstacle nail 32a.

  Since the entrance hole 33c is provided in the center of the upper side portion of the start winning opening unit 33, the game balls that have passed through the entering entrance 33c flow down (inflow) into the start winning opening unit 33 (inner game area 32). ) A game ball that passes through the entrance port 33c and falls substantially vertically passes through the entrance port 33c and is directly below the entrance port 33c and at the center of the start entrance port unit 33. A winning distribution mechanism 48 that distributes to the start winning opening 37d is provided. A guide port 43a for the stage 43 is provided immediately above the entrance port 33c.

  In addition, a special figure 1 fluctuation display LED 66 and a special figure 2 fluctuation display LED 67 are arranged in order from the top on the right edge of the center case 40 between the normal start gate 34 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  Inside the center case 40, a movable effect member 44 simulating an insect face, a display device 41, a warp device 42, and a stage 43 are arranged in this order from the top. The stage 43 extends in the left-right direction at the bottom of the center case 40. In addition, eight effect units 521a to 521h are arranged on the left and right sides of the display device 41.

  In the game board 30 according to the present embodiment, the right strike is advantageous for the player during normal hitting, during big hits and during electric support (during probability change, short time). Since the game ball flowing down during the right strike can win the special figure 1 start winning opening 36 from the right opening 33d, the reserved memory of the special figure 1 can be increased even during the electric support.

  It should be noted that the special allocation of the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

[Starting prize unit]
FIG. 138 is a front view of the start winning opening unit 33 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. In this figure, the winning distribution mechanism 48 will be described.

  The winning distribution mechanism 48 includes a rotating member 48b that rotates about the rotation shaft 48a with respect to the start winning opening unit 33 body, and a stopper member 48c that stops the rotation of the rotating member 48b. The rotating member 48b has an extending portion extending in three directions from the rotating shaft 48a. The three extending parts include a right bottom part 48b1, a left bottom part 48b2, and a standing part 48b3 that stands up with respect to the left bottom part 48b2 and the right bottom part 48b1.

  FIG. 138 (A) shows a first state (right inclined state) in which the right bottom portion 48b1 of the rotated rotating member 48b is in contact with the upper right side portion of the stopper member 48c. When the winning distribution mechanism 48 is in the first state, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 33c flows down to the L-shaped accommodation portion 48d defined by the left bottom portion 48b2 and the standing portion 48b3.

  And as shown to (B), the rotation member 48b rotates counterclockwise with the load of a game ball. The winning distribution mechanism 48 is in a second state (left-inclined state) in which the left bottom portion 48b2 of the rotated rotating member 48b is in contact with the upper left portion of the stopper member 48c. At this time, the game balls in the housing portion 48d flow down to the left (the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d side) and are distributed. Note that the game ball flowing down from the housing portion 48d to the start winning opening does not win depending on how the rotating member 48b bounces or how the starting winning openings 36 and 37 contact the upper end of the opening. In some cases, the game area 32 may jump out from the left opening 33e or the right opening 33d.

  (C) shows a state in which a game ball that has entered from the entrance 33c flows down to the accommodation portion 48d to the winning distribution mechanism 48 in the second state.

  (D) shows a state in which the sorting member is rotated clockwise by the load of the game ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 48d. The right bottom portion 48b1 of the pivoting distribution member comes into contact with the upper right side portion of the stopper member 48c and stops to enter the first state, and the game ball flows down from the housing portion 48d to the right side (special figure 1 start winning opening 36 side) and is distributed. It is done.

  As described above, the winning distribution mechanism 48 alternately turns the game balls that have entered from the entrance 33c into the right side (see Fig. 1 start winning port 36 side) and the left side (see Fig. 2 start winning port 37d) according to the load of the game ball. Side). Therefore, if there is a game ball that has passed through the entrance 33c, unless the game ball jumps outward from the right opening 33d or the left opening 33e, the start prize (start memory) of FIG. Start winnings (starting memory) occur alternately.

[First gaming state and second gaming state]
FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of the first gaming state and the second gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 140 is a front view of the center case 40 in the first gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 141 is a front view of the center case 40 in the second gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the game method is divided into a first game state and a second game state, and the production method of the production unit 521 is changed. For example, in the first gaming state, the pre-reading effect by the effect unit 521 is not executed and the light-emitting effect is executed as the decoration device 46, and in the second gaming state, the pre-reading effect of the start-up memory by the effect unit 521 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 139 as an example, there are nine combinations of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and in the present embodiment, any one of the nine combinations may be fixedly selected. Alternatively, it may be selected fluidly so that the combination changes.

  In the first combination, the normal gaming state is the first gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state is the second gaming state.

  In the second combination, the normal gaming state is the first gaming state, and the short-time gaming state is the second gaming state.

  In the third combination, the short-time gaming state is the first gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state is the second gaming state.

  In the fourth combination, the probability clear state is the first game state, and the probability ambiguous state is the second game state. The probabilistic clear state is, for example, a state in which the player can clearly recognize that the player is in the probability-changing gaming state or the normal gaming state, and the probability-unclear state is, for example, a game in which the player is in the probability-changing gaming state or the normal gaming state. It is a state that the person does not understand.

  In the fifth combination, the non-electric support state is the first gaming state, and the electric support state is the second gaming state.

  In the sixth combination, the specific pending no-memory state is the first gaming state, and the specific reserved memory state is the second gaming state. The specific reserved memory is, for example, a reserved memory that is a big hit.

  In the seventh combination, the first effect mode is the first game state, and the second effect mode is the second game state. The production mode can be classified for each production theme, for example.

  In the eighth combination, the first variation time mode is the first gaming state, and the second variation time mode is the second gaming state.

  In the ninth combination, the normal variation display state is the first gaming state, and the pseudo continuous variation display state is the second gaming state.

  In the first gaming state, as shown in FIG. 140, the movable effect member 44 stays at the upper part of the display device 41, and the effect unit 521 performs the light emission effect at the initial position (standby position, first position) outside the display device 41. Run. In the first gaming state, the effect unit 521 does not execute the movement effect.

  On the screen of the display device 41, a variable display area 79 in which special symbols are displayed is provided from the top of the screen to the middle of the screen. At the bottom of the screen, for example, a standby hold display area 80 for displaying a hold icon 83 or the like on the left side is provided, and a specific effect area 81 for displaying an effect by a character or the like is provided on the right side. In the lower center of the screen, there is provided a digestion hold display area 88 for displaying the hold memory during the execution of the variable display game.

  The standby hold display area 80 is composed of two upper and lower areas. The lower row is provided with a hold icon display area 80b in which a hold icon 83 or the like is displayed, and the upper row is a small icon indicating whether the hold memory (starting memory) is the hold memory of FIG. 1 or the hold memory of FIG. An identification icon display area 80a to be displayed is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 80b in the lower stage of the stand-by hold display area 80, a hidden shutter image and a schedule icon 85, which will be described later, are displayed in addition to the hold icon 83. The concealed shutter image 86 is for filling a free area of the hold icon display area 80b, and the schedule icon 85 indicates a place where the hold icon 83 is displayed next when a start winning (holding storage) occurs. It is an icon for.

  In the second gaming state, as shown in FIG. 141, the effect section 521 moves to the effect position (operation position, second position) in front of the display device 41, and emits and extinguishes as a hold memory (hold display). Perform effects such as swaying motion. The effect position is a position outside the movable effect member 44 moved to the front of the display device 41 and has a positional relationship in which the effect unit 521 and the movable effect member 44 do not collide.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not preferentially digested, but is digested in the winning order (memory order). Therefore, the rendering unit 521 in the second gaming state has the protection 1 (1 From the 8th reserved memory) to 8 (8th reserved memory). In addition, the movable effect member 44 becomes a display unit for holding memory during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and the specific effect area 81 becomes a special figure type display part indicating the type of special figure in each hold memory.

  It should be noted that the left effect unit 521 and the right effect unit 521 may be controlled as a unit, and the left effect unit 521 and the right effect unit 521 may each be a plurality of units.

[Prefetch command processing]
FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch command processing procedure according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. In the prefetching-type command processing of the first embodiment, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are separately set for holding notice or continuous notice, that is, setting for prefetching effect. In this embodiment, special figure 1 and special figure are set. Set without dividing FIG.

  When the variation command matches the symbol type (the result of B3603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the hold notice setting process and the continuous notice setting process (B4601, B4602), and ends this process. .

  As described above, in this embodiment, the reserved memory (starting memory) in FIG. 1 and the reserved memory (starting memory) in FIG. 2 are digested in the winning order (memory order). First, the pre-reading effects of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are set. Note that the pre-reading effect of one special figure may not be set according to the presence or absence of the electric support state.

[Hold icon]
FIGS. 143A and 143B are diagrams illustrating the hold icon 83 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 143A is a diagram illustrating the normal system hold icon, and FIG. 143B is a diagram illustrating the special system hold icon. is there.

  Since the normal system hold icon is the same as in the other embodiments, description thereof is omitted. Unlike the first to third forms, the special hold icon is “SP”, a special 3 for notifying the player of the special reach at the center of the triangular icon in order to notify the player of the special feeling. “SP3”, a notice of advance notice of advancement to reach the reach, “Crash” that gives notice of sudden probability change (2R probability change big hit), “Present” that it is confirmed that a big hit will occur For example, a hold icon 83 such as a notice hold display is provided. Among these, when the hold icon 83 of the advance notice hold display is displayed on the effect section 521, it is displayed in yellow, and when the hold icon 83 of the hit notice hold display is displayed on the effect section 521, it is displayed in green. Is displayed.

[Pending notice setting process]
FIG. 144 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a hold notice setting process according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. In the hold advance notice setting process of the present embodiment, the same hit table is set for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, and for special use, a table for special figure 2 having a lower execution rate of the notice effect than for special figure 1 is used. Is set. The notice effect is a normal hold notice in which the display mode does not change based on the execution of the preceding variable display game, or a step-up (SU) hold notice in which the display form changes based on the execution of the preceding variable display game.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining a hold change notice determination table 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. (B) is a diagram for explaining the hold change notice determination table 2 for losing in FIG. 1, and (C) is a table for explaining the hold change notice determination table 3 for losing in FIG.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure type of the target holding storage is special figure 1 (B4701).

  When the special figure type is special figure 1 (the result of B4701 is “Y”), the production control device 300 acquires the stop symbol information of the target hold memory, and whether or not the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol Is determined (B3706).

  In the case of a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “Y”), the production control device 300 displays the final hold display based on the “hold change notice determination table 1” which is a common use table for the special figure 1 special figure 2. An aspect is determined (B3707). As shown in FIG. 145 (A), the hold change notice determination table 1 is a table with a high execution ratio of notice effects. In this embodiment, in addition to the SP reach common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the special figure 1 limited SP reach (the special event unique to the special figure 1) and the special figure limited SP reach exclusive to the special figure 2 are provided. (Special Figure 2 unique event) is prepared. When the limited SP reach is selected, the pending change advance notice is not executed.

  If it is not a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines the final hold display mode based on the “hold change notice determination table 2” which is the table for losing in FIG. (B3708). As shown in FIG. 145 (B), the pending change notice determination table 2 is a table in which the execution ratio of the notice effect is medium.

  On the other hand, when the special figure type is not special figure 1 (the result of B4701 is “N”), the production control device 300 acquires the stop symbol information of the target hold memory, and the stop symbol is the jackpot symbol. It is determined whether or not (B3706).

  In the case of a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “Y”), the production control device 300 displays the final hold display based on the “hold change notice determination table 1” which is a common use table for the special figure 1 special figure 2. An aspect is determined (B3707).

  If it is not a big hit symbol (the result of B3706 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines the final hold display mode based on the “hold change notice determination table 3” which is the table for losing in FIG. (B4702). As shown in FIG. 145 (C), the hold change notice determination table 3 is a table with a low execution ratio of the notice effect.

  Following the setting of the hold change notice determination table (B3707, B3708, B4702), the effect control apparatus 300 sets the final hold display mode determined in the hold storage area of the target hold storage (B3709) and becomes the target. It is determined whether or not the final hold icon in the hold storage is a notice mode (B3710).

  When the final hold icon is a notice mode (the result of B3710 is “Y”), the production control device 300 determines whether to make a normal hold notice or a step-up (SU) hold notice by lottery (B4703). ).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the hold notice is a step-up (SU) hold notice (B4704).

  When the lottery result of the hold notice is the step up (SU) hold notice (the result of B4704 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the step up (SU) hold notice information in the corresponding hold storage area. (B4705), the processing after B3720 is executed. In the case of a step-up (SU) hold advance notice, the display mode of the hold display changes, and therefore, information suggesting change suggestion may be set in the processing after B3720.

  When the lottery result of the hold notice is not a step-up (SU) hold notice (the result of B4704 is “N”), the production control device 300 sets the normal hold notice information in the corresponding hold storage area (B4706). , B3703 and subsequent processes are executed. When it is not a step-up (SU) hold notice, there is no possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change, so change suggestion-not-notified information or the like is set in the processing after B3703.

  On the other hand, when the final hold icon is not in the notice mode (result of B3710 is “N”), the production control device 300 executes the processes after B3704. When the final hold icon is not in the notice mode, the change suggestion no-notification information is set except for the effect setting of gas.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the same pending change notice determination table 1 is set when the pending storage that is the subject of both FIG. 1 and FIG. Also, when the target hold memory is out of place, in FIG. 1, the hold change notice determination table 2 with a medium execution ratio of the notice effect is set in FIG. 1, and in FIG. A decision table 3 is set.

  Note that the execution ratio of the notice effect may be set to a low value in the hold change notice determination table 2 and the medium in the hold change notice determination table 3. On the other hand, when the limited SP reach is selected, the hold change notice is not executed, and on the other hand, the hold change notice is executed when the limited SP reach is selected. May be.

[Hold display process]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of hold display processing according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. In the hold display process of this embodiment, the display process of the identification icon 84, the display process of the concealed shutter image 86, and the like are added to the procedure of the hold display process of the first embodiment.

  Subsequent to the processes from B3801 to B3812, the effect control apparatus 300 executes a hold icon display process (B4801), an identification icon display process (B4802), a schedule icon display process (B4803), and a hidden shutter image display process (B4804). .

  The hold icon display process is a process of setting (displaying) each hold icon 83 and the effect based on the hold storage number, the hold icon display information, and the change suggestion notice information.

  The identification icon display process is a process for displaying the special figure 1 identification icon 84 a above the special figure 1 hold icon 83 and displaying the special figure 2 identification icon 84 b above the special figure 2 hold icon 83.

  The schedule icon display process is a process of displaying a schedule icon 85 indicating an area (position) where the hold icon 83 is displayed next.

  The concealed shutter image display process is a process for displaying a concealed shutter image 86 for concealing (part of) an empty area where the on-hold icon 83 is not displayed in the on-hold icon display area 80b.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current state is the second gaming state (B4805), and only in the second gaming state (the result of B4805 is “Y”), the digestion order information display process Is executed (B4806). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  The digestion order information display process is a process for displaying information related to the digestion order of the special figure 1 hold memory (startup memory) and the special figure 2 hold memory (startup memory) in the specific effect area 81. In the second gaming state, the concealment shutter hides the entire hold icon display area 80b, so that information related to the digestion order is displayed in the specific effect area 81. In the second gaming state, the identification icon 84 may or may not be displayed in the identification icon display area 80a.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 147 is a screen transition diagram centering on the standby hold display area 80 for explaining the transition of the hold display according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 147 (A) shows a state in which two special figure 1 hold memories and two special figure 2 hold memories are displayed in the first gaming state. Since the hold icon 83 is displayed in the same form in both FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the player cannot determine from the hold icon 83 whether the hold memory of FIG. 1 or the hold memory of FIG. Therefore, when the identification icon 84 displayed in the identification icon display area 80a is confirmed, two special figure 1 identification icons 84a in which the numeral 1 is displayed in the hexagonal frame and the numeral 2 in the round frame are displayed. Since two special figure 2 identification icons 84b are displayed, it is determined whether the hold icon 83 displayed in the hold icon display area 80b is the hold memory of FIG. 1 or the hold memory of FIG. be able to.

  In the digest hold display area 88, the currently stored hold storage is displayed, and the hold icons 83 are digested in order from the right side. The icons displayed in the digestion hold display area 88 are also displayed in the same form in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but since the identification icon 84 is not displayed, it is possible to determine whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 Can not.

  A schedule icon 85 is displayed on the lower left side of the fourth hold icon 83d from the right. The schedule icon 85 indicates the position where the next hold icon 83 is displayed. Next, since the schedule icon 85 is displayed at the position where the hold icon 83 is displayed, the upper limit of the hold number has not been reached, and the player can be intuitively notified that the hold number can be increased.

  Further, a concealed shutter image 86 is displayed from the left end of the hold icon display area 80b to the left side of the schedule icon 85. The concealed shutter image 86 is an image for concealing an empty area where the hold icon 83 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 80b, and slides in the left-right direction like a shutter according to the increase / decrease of the hold icon 83.

  The concealment range when four or more hold icons 83 in the first gaming state are displayed is a range in which a space for one hold icon is opened, and the concealment range when three or less hold icons 83 are displayed is This is a range in which a space for two hold icons is opened. Thus, since the concealment shutter image 86 moves in accordance with the change in the number of holds, the empty area of the hold icon display area 80b becomes inconspicuous.

  (B) represents a state in which a new winning is generated in the special figure 2 and the hold icon 83 in the blue mode with an effect is displayed. Above the hold icon 83, a special figure 2 identification icon 84b is displayed. Further, since the fifth hold icon 83e is displayed, the schedule icon 85 and the concealed shutter image 86 are moved to the left by one hold icon.

  (C) represents a state where the reserved memory is newly digested. Further, since the display of the fifth hold icon 83e disappears, the schedule icon 85 and the concealed shutter image 86 are moved to the right by one. In the digestion hold display area 88, since the identification icon 84 is not displayed for the hold memory being executed (the hold icon 83 that is displayed large), whether or not the hold memory to be executed is the special figure 2 of the round distribution advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the variable display game without making the player aware of whether it is the special figure 1 for the unfavorable round allocation.

  (D) represents a state in which the hold memory 83 is further digested and the hold icon 83 displayed in the blue mode with the effect is stepped up and displayed in the red mode with the effect. Although the schedule icon 85 has moved to the right from (C), the concealed shutter image 86 does not move because the number of reservations is three or less and a space for two reservation icons is provided. When the number of holds decreases, the concealment shutter image 86 does not cover more than a certain hold icon, so that the player can be given an impression that the number of holds has decreased and he has become lonely. Therefore, the player can be motivated to increase the number of holds and improve the lonely situation of the hold icon display area 80b. In the second gaming state, the hold change notice need not be executed by the hold icon 83.

[Director operation process]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the rendering unit operation process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. This process is a process of setting the operation mode of the effect section according to the effect state of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is the first gaming state (B4901).

  In the case of the first gaming state (result of B4901 is “Y”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the production unit is in the production position (B4902), and in the production position (in B4902). Only when the result is “Y”), the effect section 521 is moved to the initial position located on the side of the display device 41 (B4903).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variable display game is being executed (B4904), and only when it is being executed (result of B4904 is “Y”), based on the current variable scene. The lighting mode of each rendering unit 521 and movable rendering member 44 is determined (B4905), and each rendering unit 521 is lit in the determined lighting mode (B4906).

  On the other hand, when the current state is not the first gaming state (the result of B4901 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the processes after B4907 without executing the processes from B4902 to B4906.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the second gaming state (B4907).

  When the current gaming state is the second gaming state (the result of B4907 is “Y”), the presentation control device 300 determines whether or not the presentation unit 521 is in the initial position (B4908), and the initial position. Only when the result of B4908 is “Y”, the effect section 521 is moved to the effect position located in front of the display device 41 (B4909).

  Next, the production control device 300 acquires the hold icon information and the change suggestion notice information in the hold storage areas 360 and 370 of the special drawings 1 and 2 (B4910, B4911).

  Next, the production control device 300 determines the lighting mode of each production unit 521 and the movable production member 44 based on the acquired hold icon display information and the change suggestion notice information (B4912), and each production in the determined lighting mode. The part 521 is turned on (B4913). For this reason, only the production | presentation part 521 for which there exists reservation storage light-emits. In addition, the light emission mode of the production unit 521 is the lighting mode in the production unit 521 corresponding to the hold storage without the change suggestion notice information, and the blinking mode in the production unit 521 corresponding to the hold storage with the change suggestion notice information.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variable display game is being executed (B4914). If the variable display game is being executed (the result of B4914 is “Y”), the variable display game being executed is determined. It is determined whether or not is a reserved storage subject to advance notice (B4915).

  When the variable display game being executed is the hold memory subject to the advance notice (the hold memory that is not the normal hold display) (the result of B4915 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 indicates that the variable display game being executed is It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is equal to or greater than SP2 reach (B4916).

  When the running variation display game is SP2 reach or more (the result of B4916 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current time is the execution timing of the drop effect of the movable effect member 44. (B4917). The fall effect may be at the start of fluctuation, at the time of SP reach development, or at the final scene of the reach effect.

  When the current time is the execution timing of the drop effect (the result of B4917 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the drop effect of the movable effect member 44 (B4918), and ends this process. The drop effect is an effect of moving the movable effect member 44 to the front of the display device 41 (falling) and then raising it to the initial position. The movable effect member 44 may be brightened immediately before the fall.

  On the other hand, when the variable display game is not being executed (the result of B4914 is “N”), when the variable display game being executed is not a pending storage of the notice mode (the result of B4915 is “N”), the change being executed When the display game is not SP2 reach or higher (result of B4916 is “N”), when the current time is not the execution timing of the drop effect (result of B4917 is “N”), the drop effect is not executed, so the effect control The apparatus 300 ends this process.

[Transition diagram of screen, etc.]
FIGS. 149A to 149C are transition diagrams of screens and the like for explaining the operations of the rendering unit 521 and the movable rendering member 44 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 149A (A) shows a state in which the variable display game is being executed in the first gaming state. The rendering unit 521 repeats lighting and blinking, for example, in units of two at the initial position. Since the movable effect member 44 is in the first gaming state, it is waiting at the initial position. In the hold icon display area 80b, four hold icons 83 are displayed. Further, the specific effect area 81 displays a notice effect related to the running variable display game.

  (B) represents a state in which the symbol of the running variation display game is confirmed with the symbol that shifts to the second gaming state. In addition, a new winning occurs, a blue icon with an effect hold icon 83 is displayed in the hold icon display area 80b, and the right edge of the concealed shutter image 86 and the schedule icon 85 move to the left by one hold icon. ing.

  (C) represents a state in which a second game state transition effect that indicates (shows) the transition to the second game state is being executed. (C) remains in the first gaming state, and “135”, which is the outcome of the transition to the second gaming state, is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and small above the specific effect area 81.

  (D) of FIG. 149B represents a state in which the transition to the second gaming state has occurred and the rendering unit 521 has moved to the rendering position. The effect unit 521 emits light as a hold memory corresponding to the protection 1 and the protection 2 in order from the effect unit 521a at the upper left, and the effect unit 521e corresponding to the protection 5 at the upper right emits light in a blinking blue manner. Here, the blinking of the effect part 521 in the second gaming state corresponds to, for example, the effect of the hold icon 83, and suggests that the display of reliability thereafter changes.

  In the specific effect area 81, the on-hold memory in which the current variation display game is being executed is displayed as “digest”, and the winning memory of FIG. 1 or the special memory of FIG. Yes. Further, in the specific effect area 81, the variable display game is displayed as “standby” indicating that the variable storage game has not been executed, and on the right side of the standby display, the winning memory shown in FIG. It is displayed as a number whether it is a winning memory.

  (E) represents a state in which the first variable display game has been executed after the transition to the second gaming state. Since the white reserved storage is executed, the movable effect member 44 is lit in white. The movable effect member 44 in the second gaming state executes the light emission effect in a manner corresponding to the reliability of the reserved storage to be executed.

  (F) represents a state in which the symbol of the running variation display game is fixed.

  (G) in FIG. 149C shows a state in which the new variation display game is executed and the effect part 521c of the protection 3 is changed to the red aspect instead of the effect part 521d of the protection 4 that emits light in the blinking blue state. Represents.

  Thereafter, during the transition from (G) to (H), three winnings are generated, a new variable display game is started, then one winning is generated, and a new variable display game is started. Thereafter, two winnings are generated, and a new variable display game is started.

  (H) represents a state in which red storage is executed, the fluctuating symbol becomes reach, and the drop effect of the movable effect member 44 is executed. The fall effect may be at the start of fluctuation, at the time of SP reach development, or at the final scene of the reach effect.

(Effect of the fourth embodiment)
As described above, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, whether the hold icon 83 displayed in the digestion hold display area 88 is the hold memory of FIG. 1 or the hold memory of FIG. I can't tell. Therefore, it is possible for the player to entertain the variable display game without being aware of the special figure type of the variable display game being executed (that is, without being aware of the advantages and disadvantages associated with the big hit), and to improve the fun of the game. it can.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, both the hold icon 83 of FIG. 1 and the hold icon 83 of FIG. 2 are displayed by the common hold icon 83, and an identification icon is displayed at a position corresponding to the hold icon 83. 84 is displayed. Therefore, by making it possible to recognize the type of pending storage during standby, it is possible to make the player foresee the progress of the game.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the special figure 1 identification icon 84a is displayed at the position corresponding to the reserved memory in FIG. 1, and the special figure 2 is displayed at the position corresponding to the reserved memory in FIG. An identification icon 84b is displayed. Therefore, the player can immediately identify the type of pending storage that is on standby.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a common event that can be generated from either of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 can be generated from either of FIG. 1 or FIG. Is set as a unique event (special figure 1 limited SP reach or special figure 2 limited SP reach), and the hold notice mode is different for each event. Therefore, the difference due to the difference in type can be clarified, and the interest of the pending notice is improved.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the hold notice can be executed when a common event is generated, while the hold notice is not executed when a unique event is generated. Therefore, the player cannot foresee the occurrence of the unique event, and can improve the interest of the game when the unique event occurs.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the schedule icon 85 indicating the place where the next hold icon 83 is displayed is displayed in the hold icon display area 80b. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by making the player know where the hold icon 83 is displayed next, and to entertain the player's eyes by moving the scheduled icon 85 by increasing or decreasing the number of holds. it can. Further, when the number of holds decreases (when the number of holds becomes 3 or less), the space between the concealment shutter and the hold icon 83 becomes two hold icons. A state in which the schedule icon 85 is linked to the left-right movement and a state in which the schedule icon 85 is not linked are born, and the player can enjoy the eyes.

  In addition, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, in the first gaming state, the rendering unit (light emitting unit) 521 that waits at the initial position and executes the lighting effect as a decoration device, the rendering position in the second gaming state. To move to, and emit light as a display part of the hold memory. In addition, the number of effect units 521 corresponding to the number of holds is emitted at the effect position. Therefore, the player can intuitively grasp whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state depending on the position of the effect unit 521, and can provide a novel effect that has never been achieved.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when the effect unit 521 is changed from the effect position to the standby position, the light emission notice by the effect unit 521 is ended. Therefore, the state in which the effect unit 521 is arranged at the effect position can be a state specialized for the light emission notice (a state in which the light emission notice is executed), and the playability is improved.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the moving range of the rendering unit 521 does not overlap the moving range of the movable rendering member 44. Therefore, it can avoid that the production | presentation part 521 and the movable production | generation member 44 mutually interfere, and an effective production can be performed.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the notice effect is executed in the specific effect area 81 in the first gaming state, and the pending storage in the specific effect area 81 in the second game state is being executed and in standby. The special figure type is displayed. Therefore, for example, even if the execution period of the variable display game is short due to time reduction or the like, it is possible to quickly confirm the type of hold storage. In addition, the player can enjoy the game while looking only at the hold icon 83, and can enjoy the game while looking at the information displayed in the specific effect area 81, thereby widening the range of game play.

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the concealed shutter image 86 is displayed in a predetermined empty area of the hold icon display area 80b. Therefore, it is possible to reduce giving a player a feeling of psychological burden that a vacant area in a state where the number of holdings is small is not conspicuous and is difficult until the vacant space is filled. In addition, since the concealment shutter image 86 moves to the left and right by increasing or decreasing the number of holds, it is possible to entertain the eyes of the player. Further, when the number of holds decreases, the concealment shutter image 86 does not hide more than a certain number of held icons (for two held icons), so that it is possible to give the player an impression that the number of held is reduced and lonely. . Therefore, the player can be motivated to increase the number of holdings and improve the lonely situation of the holding icon display area 80b (willing to continue to play actively).

  Further, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the game balls that have passed through the ball entrance 33c are alternately placed on the right side (see Fig. 1 start winning port 36 side) by the winning distribution mechanism 48 by the load of the game balls. Allocate to the left side (Special Figure 2 start winning opening 37d side). Therefore, the game balls that have passed through the entrance 33c are alternately awarded to the special figure 1 start winning opening 36 and the special figure 2 start winning opening 37d. Further, since the right opening 33d and the left opening 33e are provided, even a game ball that has passed through the entrance 33c may jump out to the game area 32 outside the start winning opening unit 33, and the right There is a case where the start winning opening unit 33 jumps from the outside to the inside through the opening 33d or the left opening 33e. In particular, since the game ball can win the special figure 1 start winning opening 36 from the right opening 33d at the time of the right hit, the reserved memory of the special figure 1 can be increased even during the right-handed electric support. For this reason, it seems that a special prize is generated alternately between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at a glance, and an irregular prize is generated, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment]
In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the concealed shutter image 86 conceals all the held icon display areas 80b in the second gaming state. Moreover, in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment, the identification icon 84 displays only the special figure 2 identification icon 84b.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a display screen in the second gaming state according to Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 151 is an enlarged view of the standby hold display area 80 and the digest hold display area 88 in the first gaming state according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In this modified example, when the second gaming state is entered, the concealment shutter image 86 conceals all the hold icon display areas 80b. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be shifted from the hold icon display area 80b to the peripheral part centered on the display screen, and the player can enjoy the notice change by the effect part 521 and the movable effect member 44.

  Instead of the concealed shutter image 86 concealing the entire hold icon display area 80b, the display of the hold icon display area 80b itself may disappear during the second gaming state. The concealed shutter image 86 may also conceal all the identification icon display area 80a so that the player cannot grasp the number of holds.

  In the present modification, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 151, only the special figure 2 identification icon 84b is displayed as the identification icon 84 regardless of the gaming state. Only the special figure 1 identification icon 84a may be displayed. Therefore, the control load of the production control device 300 can be reduced.

  Since the special figure identification icon 84 is not displayed in the digestion pending display area 88, the player is not conscious of the type of special figure (a memory of a round distribution that is disadvantageous or advantageous for the player). Can enjoy the variable display game.

(Effects of Modification 1 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when the second gaming state is set, the concealed shutter image 86 conceals all the hold icon display areas 80b. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be shifted from the hold icon display area 80b to the peripheral part centered on the display screen, and the player can enjoy the notice change by the effect part 521 and the movable effect member 44.

  Moreover, according to the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention, only the special figure 2 identification icon 84b is displayed as the identification icon 84 irrespective of a game state. Therefore, the control load of the production control device 300 can be reduced.

  Moreover, according to the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention, the special figure identification icon 84 is not displayed on the digestion suspension display area 88. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the variable display game without making the player aware of the type of special figure.

[Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment]
In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, each rendering unit 521 moves to the initial position during the period when the specific reach is being executed even in the second gaming state.

[Transition diagram of screen, etc.]
FIG. 152 is a transition diagram of screens and the like for explaining operations of the rendering unit 521 and the movable rendering member 44 in the second gaming state according to Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 152A shows that a reach has occurred in the second gaming state. Here, the reach is divided into a normal reach and a long reach.

  In the case of normal reach, as shown in (B-1), the effect section 521 emits light at the effect position, and the effect is executed at the effect position even when the symbol is determined (C-1).

  On the other hand, when it is longer reach or more (long reach, special 1 to 4 reach), as shown in (B-2), even if it is in the second gaming state, it is produced immediately after the reach occurs. The part 521 moves from the effect position to the initial position, and shifts from the hold display mode to the decoration light emission mode as the decoration device 46. In this case, the rendering unit 521 may be in the hold display mode as it is.

  And when it is off, it changes to (C-1), and when it is a win, it changes to (C-2). In (C-2), the big hit is confirmed, and the production unit performs a light emission production such as flashing all at once.

  After the big hit is confirmed, as shown in (C-3), when shifting to the big hit (special game state), the production unit 521 moves to the production position and emits light as a hold display mode.

(Effect of the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment)
As described above, according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when a long reach occurs in the second gaming state, the rendering unit 521 moves from the rendering position in front of the display device 41 to the display device 41. Move to the initial side position. Therefore, the visibility of the display screen is improved, and the player can fully recognize the reach effect. In addition, since each effect unit 521 also emits decorative light as a reach effect, the reach performance of the reach effect is improved.

  Also, according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when the long reach is confirmed with a big hit, the effect section 521 returns from the standby position to the effect position. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently ensure a state in which the light emission notice is executed. In addition, during the reach of the long reach or more, the production unit 521 refrains from the side, and after the big hit is confirmed, the production unit 521 moves to the production position, so that a special feeling of the big hit can be produced.

[Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment]
In the third modification of the fourth embodiment, the effect unit 521 moves to the effect position during the pseudo continuous variation, and functions as a countdown type pseudo hold in which the effect unit 521 is turned off each time the pseudo continuous variation proceeds.

[Transition diagram of screen, etc.]
FIG. 153 is a transition diagram of screens and the like for explaining the operation of the display unit and the movable effect member 44 when the pseudo continuous variation of the third modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention occurs.

  FIG. 153 (A) shows a state in which the first pseudo continuous fluctuation starts. The rendering unit 521 emits light in the decorative light emission mode at the initial position until the pseudo continuous fluctuation is started.

  (B) represents a state in which the first pseudo-variable variation is started and the effect section 521 has moved to the effect position. The seven effect units 521 except for the lower right effect unit 521e emit light in a white manner. The production unit 521 may swing in conjunction with the screen production. The lower right effect unit 521e is turned off to indicate that the first pseudo-variation is being executed.

  (C) represents a state in which the second pseudo-variation is started. The production unit 521f is turned off to indicate that the second pseudo-variation is being executed.

  (D) represents a state in which the second time of the pseudo continuous fluctuation has progressed.

  (E) represents a state in which the third pseudo-variation is started. The production unit 521g is turned off to indicate that the third pseudo-variation is being executed.

  (F) represents a state in which the third pseudo-variation has progressed.

  (G) represents a state in which the fourth pseudo-variation is started. The production unit 521h is turned off to indicate that the fourth pseudo-variation is being executed.

  (H) represents a state in which the fourth pseudo-variation has progressed.

(Effect of Modification 3 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the third modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the rendering unit 521 moves from the initial position to the rendering position in accordance with the start of the pseudo continuous variation, and the number of pseudo continuous variations increases. The production unit 521 turns off every time. As a result, the stunning performance in the pseudo-continuous variation can be improved, and the player can intuitively grasp how the variation is, which improves the fun of the game.

[Modification 4 of the fourth embodiment]
In the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, the effect unit 521 functions as a count-up type pseudo hold in which the effect unit 521 moves to the effect position each time the pseudo-continuous change proceeds.

[Transition diagram of screen, etc.]
FIG. 154 is a transition diagram of screens and the like for explaining the operations of the rendering unit 521 and the movable rendering member 44 when the pseudo continuous variation of the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention occurs.

  FIG. 154 (A) shows a state in which the first pseudo continuous fluctuation starts. The rendering unit 521 emits light in the decorative light emission mode at the initial position until the pseudo continuous fluctuation is started.

  (B) represents a state in which the first pseudo-variation change is started and the effect unit 521a in the upper left has moved to the effect position. The light emission mode of the production unit 521 that has moved to the production position shifts from the decorative light emission mode to the pseudo continuous light emission mode.

  (C) represents a state in which the second pseudo-variation is started.

  (D) represents a state in which the second time of the pseudo continuous fluctuation has progressed. The effect part 521b has moved to the effect position.

  (E) represents a state in which the third pseudo-variation is started.

  (F) represents a state in which the third pseudo-variation has progressed. The effect part 521c has moved to the effect position.

  (G) represents a state in which the fourth pseudo-variation is started.

  (H) represents a state in which the fourth pseudo-variation has progressed.

(Effects of Modification 4 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the rendering unit 521 moves to the rendering position each time the number of pseudo-continuous changes proceeds. As a result, the stunning performance in the pseudo-continuous variation can be improved, and the player can intuitively grasp how the variation is, which improves the fun of the game.

[Fifth Modification of Fourth Embodiment]
In the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment, the hold icon 83 is changed by the action of the notice suggestion character 73 that changes the display mode of the hold icon 83.

[Notice suggestion character]
FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the notice suggestion character 73 of the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 156 is a screen transition diagram illustrating changes in the hold icon 83 by the notice suggestion character 73 according to the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 155 as an example, the notice suggestion character 73 of this modification is a character A 73c that changes the light emission mode of the white-type hold icon 83 by acting on the white-type hold icon 83, and the blue-type hold icon 83. A character B73d that changes the light emission mode of the hold icon 83 in the blue mode by acting on the character B73d, and a character C73e that changes the light emission mode of the hold icon 83 in the red mode by acting on the red mode hold icon 83 are prepared.

  The notice suggestion character 73 can act on the pending (undigested) hold icon 83 and the active (digested) hold icon 83.

  In FIG. 156 (A), a white hold icon 83 is displayed in the digest hold display area 88, and a white hold icon 83a with effects, white hold icons 83b to 83d, and effects are added to the hold icon display area 80b. A blue hold icon 83e is displayed. Since there are two hold icons 83 with effects, two notice suggestion icons appear after this.

  (B) represents a state in which the character A 73c appears first and then the character B 73d appears during the digestion of the white with effect after digesting one reserved memory. Then, the character A 73c acts on the pending hold icon 83 to change to the blue mode. When there are a plurality of hold icons 83 to be changed (including the hold icon 83 of the Gasse effect mode), the notice suggesting character 73 appears with a time difference and the hold icon 83 is changed.

  (C) represents a state in which the subsequent character B 73d has changed the blue holding icon 83d with an effect into a red form. When a plurality of hold icons 83 with the same color are displayed, one notice suggesting character 73 can act on the hold icon 83 with the effect of the same color to change the mode of the hold icon 83. .

(Effects of Modification 5 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, according to the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the notice suggestion character 73 is not set corresponding to the reliability as in the first embodiment, It is set corresponding to the mode of the hold icon 83. Further, the notice suggestion character 73 works (acts) on the hold icon 83 with an effect to change the hold icon 83. Therefore, the player's eyes can be entertained by the performance by the notice suggestion character 73, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the first to fourth embodiments, the hold icon 83 with an effect suggesting a change of the hold icon 83 changes the notification mode of the reliability under a predetermined condition. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a hold change warp device 75 for causing a hold change is provided, and when a condition such as the number of hold becomes a certain number or more is satisfied, The hold icon 83 changes based on the incoming ball.

[Game board]
FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The present embodiment is characterized in that a holding change warp device 75 and a passing gate 76 are provided in the center case 40.

  In the center case 40, there are a chance notification unit 77, a holding change warp device 75, a display device 41, a warp device 42 for guiding a game ball to the stage 43, and a stage 43 in which characters “MEMORY CHANCE” are drawn in order from the top. Provided.

  The hold change warp device 75 is provided with an entrance (hold change warp entrance) 75a at the top of the center case 40, for example, and the first half 75b of the passage is led from the hold change warp entrance 75a to the upper right region of the display device 41. The second half 75c of the passage is arranged from the upper right area of the display device 41 to the lower right area of the display device 41. Below the second half 75c of the passage, there is provided a passing gate 76 for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the holding change warp device 75, and the gaming ball that has passed through the passing gate 76 becomes an out ball. Note that the pending change warp inlet 75a may be regarded as an outlet.

  Both the chance notification unit 77 and the passage gate 76 are provided with LEDs (not shown) inside and can emit light.

  A pair of obstacle nails 32a is arranged on the left and right of the game area 32 outside the center case 40, just above the reserved change warp entrance 75a. The pair of obstacle nails 32a is arranged with a width that allows a game ball to pass therethrough.

  Since the arrangement and configuration of the game area 32 outside the other center case 40 are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  As in the case of the fourth embodiment, in this embodiment as well, in FIG. 2, the round distribution at the time of big hit is an advantageous distribution for the player.

[Pending change production process]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the pending change effect process according to the fifth embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current number of holds is the upper limit value (B5001). The upper limit value is set to 8, for example.

  Only when the current number of holds is not the upper limit (the result of B5001 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the specific reach (SP reach) is being executed (B5002). When the specific reach is not being executed (the result of B5002 is “N”), the effect control device 300 turns off the chance notification unit 77 and the passing gate 76 (B5003), and ends this process.

  If the current hold count is the upper limit (the result of B5001 is “Y”), or if the specific reach is being executed even if the hold count is not the upper limit (the result of B5002 is “Y The production control device 300 causes the chance notification unit 77 and the passage gate 76 to emit light (B5004).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the passage gate 76 (B5005). If it has not passed (the result of B5005 is “N”), this process ends.

  When it passes (the result of B5005 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 outputs a passing sound (B5006), and frames the hold icon 83 displayed in the standby hold display area 80 (B5007). .

  Next, the production control apparatus 300 acquires final hold icon information from the standby hold storage areas 363 to 366 (B5008), and determines a hold icon 83 corresponding to the final hold icon information (B5009).

  Next, the effect control device 300 frames the determined hold icon 83 in the standby hold display area 80 (B5010), and ends this process.

  In this way, when the number of holds reaches the upper limit of 8 or when SP reach is executed, the passing gate 76 becomes effective, and when the hold change warp device 75 has entered the hold icon 83. Changes occur.

  In the case where the hold icon 83 has already changed, if the game ball further passes through the passing gate 76, the rank of the hold icon 83 may be increased to further increase the reliability of the notice.

[Change of hold icon]
FIGS. 159A and 159B are front views in the center case 40 for explaining the change of the hold icon 83 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 159A is a state where the passing gate 76 is not activated. (B) is a state in which the passing gate 76 is activated, (C) is a state in which the game ball has passed through the passing gate 76 in the activated state, and (D) is a diagram showing a state in which the hold icon 83 is changed.

  FIG. 159A (A) shows a state in which the number of holds is 7, and the passing gate 76 is not activated. The chance notification unit 77 and the passing gate 76 are turned off, and the hold icon 83 does not change even when the player enters the hold change warp device 75.

  (B) represents a state in which the number of holdings is 8, and the passing gate 76 is activated. When the passing gate 76 becomes effective, the chance notification unit 77 and the passing gate 76 emit light to notify the activation. The ball passages 75b and 75c may also emit light as an activation notification.

  (C) represents a state in which the game ball passes through the passing gate 76 and the hold icon 83 temporarily frames out of the hold icon display area 80b. A passing sound is output when the game ball passes through the validated passing gate 76.

  (D) represents a state in which the display mode of the hold icon 83 is changed and the frame is entered in the hold icon display area 80b. Further, since the game ball has passed through the passing gate 76, the chance notification unit 77 and the passing gate 76 are turned off. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon 83 of the hold storage being executed may be changed by frame-out and frame-in.

(Effect of 5th Embodiment)
As described above, according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the pass gate 76 becomes effective when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit or the SP reach is executed, and when the game ball passes the pass gate 76, the change target The hold icons 83 of all change simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an exhilarating and unprecedented production, which improves the fun of the game.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the pass gate 76 that has been activated, all the held icons 83 are framed out at the same time, and then frame-in is performed in the display mode after the change, so that a player can have a sense of expectation.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 11 body frame 12 front frame (game frame)
13 Projection production unit 15 Glass frame 19 Speaker 24 Operation handle 25 Production button 30 Game board 32 Game area 34 Normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate)
35 General prize opening 36 Start prize opening (first start prize area)
37 Ordinary variation winning device 37b Movable member (movable piece)
38 1st special variation winning device 39 2nd special variation winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board production device (movable production member, movable member)
46 Decoration device (decorative member)
48 Award distribution mechanism 50 Collective display device (LED)
61 Magnetic sensor switch 62 Radio wave sensor 63 Glass frame open detection switch 64 Front frame open detection switch 71 External information terminal 73 Advance suggestion character 74 Advance notice character 75 Hold change warp device 76 Passing gate 77 Chance notification section 79 Fluctuation display area 80 Standby hold display Area 80a Identification icon display area 80b Hold icon display area 81 Specific effect area 83 Hold icon 84 Identification icon 85 Scheduled icon 86 Concealed shutter image 87 Mode display section 88 Digestion hold display area 89a Special figure 1 hold number display part 89b Special figure 2 hold Number display part 91 Dispensing motor 100 Game control device (main board)
200 Dispensing Control Device 300 Production Control Device 400 Power Supply Device 500 Hold Display Unit Case 501 Base Member 502 Shielding Wall (Shielding)
503 Translucent lens unit 510 Reservation display unit (second display unit)
511 Hold display section (Mechanical hold memory)
512 Petal (movable member)
513 Hold display LED (hold light)
514 Box part 515 Door (movable member)
516 Operation Suggesting Light Emitting Unit 520 Unit Base 521 Production Unit

Claims (7)

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the variable display game is executed on the display unit based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening and the variable display game has a special result,
The start port includes a first start port and a second start port,
In the display unit, a first display area and a second display area aligned with the first display area are set,
First start storage means capable of storing a first start memory that is a right to execute the variable display game generated based on a winning of a game ball at the first start opening;
Second starting storage means capable of storing a second starting memory that is an execution right of the variable display game generated based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting port;
Fluctuation display game execution means capable of executing the fluctuation display game by digesting the first start memory and the second start memory in the order of the winnings;
A standby hold display means capable of displaying a hold image corresponding to the first start-up memory and a hold image corresponding to the second start-up memory in the first display area side by side in the order in which the winnings are generated;
Digestion hold display means capable of displaying a hold image indicating start memory provided for execution of the variable display game in the second display area,
When a special gaming state occurs as a result of the variable display game based on the second start memory, a player is more likely to experience a special gaming state as a result of the variable display game based on the first start memory. Set it to be advantageous,
The standby hold display means displays the hold image corresponding to the first start memory or the hold image corresponding to the second start memory so as to be identifiable.
The digestion hold display means displays the hold image corresponding to the first start memory or the hold image corresponding to the second start memory in an indistinguishable manner.   The standby hold display means displays a common hold image regardless of the type of the first start memory or the second start memory, and the type of start memory at a position corresponding to the common hold image The identification image that can identify the image is displayed, so that it is possible to identify whether the image is a reserved image corresponding to the first start memory or a reserved image corresponding to the second start memory. The gaming machine according to 1.   The standby hold display means can display a first identification image at a position corresponding to a common hold image indicating the first start-up memory, and a first position at a position corresponding to the common hold image indicating the second start-up memory. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein two identification images can be displayed. Pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the results of the variable display game corresponding to the first start memory and the second start memory before executing the variable display game;
Based on the result of the prior determination, a hold advance notice means capable of executing a hold advance notice using the hold image corresponding to the pre-determined start-up memory as the advance hold image;
A concealed image display unit capable of concealing the reserved image displayed in the first display region with a concealed image displayed in the first display region based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The game machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the concealed image is concealed by the concealed image, while the identification image is not concealed. Pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the results of the variable display game corresponding to the first start memory and the second start memory before executing the variable display game;
Based on the result of the prior determination, a hold advance notice means capable of executing a hold advance notice using the hold image corresponding to the pre-determined start-up memory as the advance hold image, and
A common event that can occur from either the first start memory and the second start memory, and a unique event that can occur from one of the first start memory and the second start memory but not from the other Is set,
2. The hold notice unit changes the execution form of the hold notice depending on whether the pre-determined start-up memory generates the common event or the unique event. 4. The gaming machine according to any one of 4.   The hold notice means is capable of executing the hold notice when the pre-determined start memory generates the common event, while the pre-determined start memory generates the unique event. 6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the holding notice is not executed. The first start memory means and the second start memory means can store a plurality of start memories each up to a prescribed number,
The first display area is set to a width capable of displaying a number of the reserved images corresponding to the specified number.
In the first display area, there is provided position specifying image display means capable of displaying a position specifying image capable of specifying a position where the hold image will be displayed next. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6.

Images